• Dive into mastering blackjack by understanding key rules and embracing fundamental strategies that lay the foundation for a successful gaming experience.
• Elevate your casino gameplay to a higher level by delving into the world of card counting techniques, a skill that seasoned players utilize to gain a statistical edge over the casino.
• Harness the power of effective bankroll management strategies to ensure that your gaming funds are strategically allocated and safeguarded against unnecessary risks.
• Explore the realm of advanced betting systems such as the Martingale or Paroli strategies to fine-tune your wagering approach and capitalize on favorable streaks at the blackjack table.
• Continuously refine your blackjack skills through deliberate practice with free blackjack games, ongoing study, and adaptive gameplay strategies that evolve with your experience and insights gained from previous sessions.

Blackjack is a unique and exciting casino game that involves both skill and luck. It��s a simple game to learn, but one that requires studying and practice to master.

With that in mind, if you��re looking for proven tips and strategies on how to increase your chances of winning in blackjack, you��ve come to the right place!

This article will overview everything from basic blackjack tips to advanced strategies, money management techniques, and more. Read on to learn how to boost your success at the blackjack table.

Essential Blackjack Tips for Beginners

Before you start playing blackjack for real money, it��s essential to understand all of the basic blackjack rules. The objective of the game is to get as close to 21 without going over it and have a higher-valued total than the dealer. To do so, you have to decide when you want to hit, stand, double down, split, or exercise any of the other blackjack side bets.

Regarding basic strategy tips, there are several considerations that you should keep in mind to be a better blackjack player. Here are a few essential blackjack tips for beginners:

• Always stand on a hard 17 or higher
• Always stand on a total of 12 to 16 if the dealer��s upcard is 2-6
• Double down on an 11 hand
• Always split Aces and 8s
• Never split 10s and 5s

If you��re playing blackjack in a live casino venue, it��s also good to learn the hand signals, as this will ensure a smoother and more immersive gambling experience. There are a handful of blackjack hand signals, so we��ll briefly cover each of them below:

• Hit – If you want to add another card to your total, gently tap the table in front of you to signal the dealer that you want to hit.
• Stand – If you��re content with your hand total and want to stand, wave your hand over your cards to signal to the dealer that you don��t want any additional cards.
• Double Down – To double down, match your initial wager with the same amount of chips next to it and hold one finger up.
• Split – If you want to split a pair, you place an additional bet matching your original wager and make a V-shape with two fingers next to your cards without touching them.

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Advanced Blackjack Strategies

When you��ve mastered the basic blackjack tips we��ve covered above, you can confidently move to more advanced strategies. In this regard, here are a few advanced tips for playing blackjack.

Using the Basic Strategy Chart

Blackjack is a decision-driven game, so every choice you make directly impacts your success in it. Luckily, the blackjack pros who have come before us have already outlined the optimal ways of playing the game. The best way to play blackjack is to use the optimal strategy chart that helps you make the right decision in every scenario.

A basic blackjack strategy chart considers your cards and the dealer��s upcard to instruct you when to hit, stand, split, double, or surrender. Of course, even this chart can��t guarantee a win every time. But, it can statistically give your hand the best winning chances.

Learning to read a blackjack chart is fairly straightforward, and you can even bring it to the casino. Moreover, many land-based venues even sell these helpful charts in-house. With this in mind, make sure to use the right chart for the blackjack variation you��re playing and never deviate from the basic strategy.

If you��re playing online, you can even play free blackjack in demo mode. This is a great way to practice using the basic strategy chart before you start playing with real money.

Mastering Card Counting

Card counting is arguably the most appreciated advantage technique among blackjack players. And for good reason. With optimal play and a well-practiced card-counting system, you can get approximately a 1% advantage over the casino, on average.

If you��re a beginner, mastering card counting can be challenging, but it��s still possible to master simple and effective card-counting systems like Hi-Lo with some practice. With that said, while card counting is a viable technique to obtain the edge, you should be aware that casinos frown upon this, and it doesn��t work in online games.

Understanding the True Count and Its Impact

Since nearly all casinos use six to eight blackjack decks for their games, counting cards is more complex than it used to be for single-deck blackjack. Primarily, to successfully count cards, you also need to understand the true count and how it affects the blackjack house edge.

In simplest terms, the true count represents the average ratio of high to low cards remaining per deck. For instance, let��s say that the true count is +2. This means that there are two more high cards per deck than low cards, giving you a slight advantage over the casino.

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Money Management Techniques

Apart from understanding basic and advanced blackjack strategies, knowing how to manage your money is a vital part of being successful when playing blackjack. So, to make sure you have this aspect covered as well, we��ve prepared a few helpful money management tips.

Setting a Budget and Sticking to It

Setting a blackjack bankroll is the most important part of proper money management. This bankroll should only be up to the maximum amount you can afford to lose without experiencing any financial strain.

Set a total bankroll and a session bankroll that you��ll take with you for individual gambling sessions. Creating these clear financial guidelines will enable you to enjoy your blackjack sessions without worrying about losing too much money or feeling the urge to chase losses.

Managing Wins and Losses

No matter how skilled you become at blackjack, the game still involves a significant degree of luck. This means that wins and losses are two inseparable parts of the game, and you��re bound to experience both. The key is knowing how to manage these highs and lows without letting them affect your bankroll.

The best way to manage wins and losses is to always have a long-term focus and set realistic goals you can target. Don��t let emotions guide your bets when experiencing hot and cold streaks. Always play with a clear head. Don��t allow winning streaks to make you overconfident and reckless. In the same breath, don��t get disheartened by losses and bet when you��re not composed.

Using Betting Systems Wisely

Blackjack betting systems can be a great way to ensure a systematic approach to wagering and aid in bankroll control. That is if you pick the right betting system for your bankroll and betting preferences.

There are many different betting systems you can choose from like Martingale, Fibonacci, Paroli, and others. Make sure you pick a betting system that works for you and use it wisely, but remember that even this methodical strategy won��t guarantee you wins.

Blackjack Tips: Common Blackjack Mistakes to Avoid

Since blackjack involves a skill element, it��s also possible to make mistakes that can cost you money and hinder your long-term success. Here are the most common ones beginner blackjack players make:

• Missplaying Soft Hands – Soft hands are less likely to bust out, which causes many players, especially beginners, to often play them more recklessly. In this regard, while soft hands provide more freedom in decision-making, be careful not to misplay them and always stick to the basic blackjack strategy.

• Ignoring Table Rules and Conditions – Playing blackjack without a complete understanding of all the rules and conditions increases your chances of making mistakes. If you��re playing online, rules are most often transparently outlined in the game info. If you��re playing in a brick-and-mortar venue, don��t hesitate to ask the dealer to explain any rule or condition you��re unsure about.

• Over-betting and Chasing Losses – When over-betting, you��re needlessly straining your blackjack bankroll by placing larger wagers than you can afford. Moreover, if this leads to a bad run and your bankroll drains quickly, you might feel the need to chase losses. Both of these common mistakes will most often result in money loss, so you should be mindful of them and try to avoid making them.

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Blackjack Etiquette and Best Practices

In addition to knowing helpful blackjack tips and tricks, it��s also good to know some basic etiquette and best practices you should be mindful of when at the blackjack table.

If you��re mainly playing online blackjack, you can apply some of these tips, but they primarily pertain to live casino blackjack games in brick-and-mortar venues.

Interacting with the Dealer and Other Players

Blackjack falls in the middle of the road when comparing the social aspect of casino games. It��s not as social as craps, but there is still some social aspect and interaction between participants.

With that in mind, you shouldn��t feel obligated to engage in small talk with the dealer or other players if you want to be silent and play. On the other hand, it��s completely normal to chat with others and have gambling and non-gambling conversations if they��re interested in engaging with you in this way.

Tips on Tipping

In land-based casinos, especially in the US, it��s customary to tip the dealer when you win. If you��re playing at the lowest stakes, it��s understandable not to tip, as any tip could have a noticeable impact on your EV. That said, even for bets of $5 or $10 per hand, tipping a couple of bucks after a few consecutive wins is common practice.

For players wagering at $20 minimum bet blackjack tables or higher, a customary tip is $5 to $10 or a percentage of a win. When it comes to the latter, this can be anywhere from two to five percent.

Maintaining Composure

Maintaining your composure is one of the most important pieces of blackjack etiquette, particularly when you��re playing in a land-based casino. Understanding and controlling your emotions is essential, as failing to do so can negatively affect your session and ruin the gambling experience for others at the table.

Always be courteous and respectful toward the dealer and other players. Even if you��re experiencing a losing streak, try to stay calm and not let this cause you to act impolitely or unpleasantly toward others.

Image credit: Netfalls Remy Musser/Shutterstock

Blackjack Tips: Answering Popular Blackjack Questions

What is the Best Strategy for Blackjack?

The best blackjack strategy is outlined in a blackjack chart, which tells you exactly what move to make based on your card total and the dealer��s upcard. A blackjack strategy chart will help you make the optimal decision every time, and you can even use it when playing blackjack in land-based casinos.

How to Consistently Win at Blackjack?

If you��re looking for tips on how to win blackjack every time, it��s essential to know that there��s no way to guarantee winning when playing this card game. That said, to maximize your long-term winning chances, make sure you understand the fundamentals, practice with free blackjack, use a blackjack chart, and manage your bankroll carefully.

Is There Any Trick to Blackjack?

Blackjack is a very straightforward game, although there are a few tips you can keep in mind to play it more proficiently. Some of the basics include always standing when your hand is 12-16 and the dealer is showing 2-6. Additionally, you should always split Aces and 8s and never split 10s and 5s.

What is the 777 Rule in Blackjack?

The 777 rule in Blazing 7s Blackjack is that you win if one of your first two cards is a 7. Additionally, the payout is more generous if both of your cards are 7s and if the dealer is also showing a 7 as their upcard.

• Establish clear blackjack bankroll limits that align with your budget and gaming goals to effectively manage your gambling funds.
• Explore advanced strategies like the Kelly Criterion or the Martingale system to enhance your betting approach and increase the potential for significant returns.
• Implement a disciplined risk management strategy by dynamically adjusting your bet sizes based on the fluctuations in your bankroll.
• Embrace the concept of progressive betting, a strategy that involves systematically increasing your bets after wins and decreasing them after losses.
• Continuously evaluate and refine your bankroll strategy to remain agile and responsive to the ever-changing dynamics of blackjack gameplay.

Playing blackjack online, or at a casino, without a bankroll strategy is a surefire way to ensure you run out of money. A bankroll management strategy helps you track your money, lets you use various betting systems, and many other strategies that can result in more profitable sessions.

In this comprehensive article, we��ll help you create the most suitable blackjack bankroll for your budget, share effective blackjack strategies, and cover various basic and advanced tips for growing your bankroll.

Let��s get into it!

Understanding Your Blackjack Bankroll

Your blackjack bankroll is the amount you set aside only for playing blackjack. Proper money management is key if you want to be successful in this game. A blackjack tip many beginner players overlook the importance of setting a bankroll, this is one of the first things you should take care of before playing for real money.

With that in mind, the blackjack bankroll must be separate from all of your other finances. This should only be the amount you can afford to lose without impacting your other financial obligations in any way.

When discussing basic blackjack money management terminology, we can define two distinct types of blackjack bankrolls.

Total Bankroll vs Bet Size

The first one is your total bankroll, the sum of money you��ve set aside for playing blackjack. The second is your session bankroll. This is the amount of money you��ll use for a specific blackjack session.

Splitting your total blackjack into smaller amounts for sessions enables you to still enjoy the game without worrying about losing your entire budget during a bad session and a run of poor cards.

Additionally, you should factor in the size of your betting units, which are the fixed base amount you will wager per bet. These should be directly proportionate to your session and total bankroll. Understanding the basic terms, we can move to the first step of blackjack bankroll management – choosing the right amount based on your overall budget.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

How Much Should Your Blackjack Bankroll be?

To answer this right off the bat, there��s no universal blackjack bankroll that works for every player. However, when learning the basic blackjack rules, you can choose the right amount for yourself without a bankroll calculator or any other tool.

The easiest way to go about this is to first set the base betting unit you will use when wagering at the blackjack table.

In this first example, let��s say you plan on betting $10 per hand. Your overall blackjack bankroll should ideally be 1000x the betting unit amount, meaning $10,000 in this case. Your session bankroll should be at least 30x to 40x the betting unit amount, but ideally 100x. This means you would take $1,000 for a single session.

With these numbers in mind, it��s fairly easy to calculate the bankroll you need based on the size of the bets you want to make.

Blackjack Bankroll Management Example

For instance, let��s say that you want to set a slightly higher betting unit of $25 per blackjack round.

Using the same principle from the first example, this would mean you need 1000x your betting unit or $25,000 for your total bankroll or 30x to 100x ($750 to $2,500) for your single session bankroll.

Having a sufficient bankroll in relation to your bets minimizes the risk of losing your entire bankroll in a single session or even having a tremendously bad day in the first place.

There are many free blackjack risk of ruin calculator tools available online if you want to dig deeper into this concept, but having 1000x overall bankroll and 100x session bankroll as a rule of thumb is more than enough to start enjoying the game.

Strategies for Blackjack Bankroll Management

Setting your bankroll is just the first step. When you��ve taken care of this, several other strategies and considerations will help you manage it and make the best of the money you have.

Arguably, the most important strategic consideration regarding your bankroll pertains to the bet sizing techniques you��ll use during your session. The simplest bet sizing technique is to use a flat betting system. This involves always betting your base betting unit and never increasing or decreasing your bet size, no matter how your session is going.

That said, if you want to deviate from this basic blackjack strategy and have a more hands-on approach, you can apply a progressive betting system. When it comes to this, you can choose either positive or negative progression betting strategies.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Blackjack Betting Strategies

The core principle of positive progression betting strategies is to increase your bet size after each win and go back to the initial bet size after a loss. The most popular positive progression betting systems in blackjack include the Paroli system, the Reverse Labouchere system, and the 1-3-2-6 system.

Negative progression betting strategies have a completely different approach of increasing bet sizes after losses and decreasing them after wins. Some of the most used negative progression strategies include the Martingale strategy, the Labouchere system, the Fibonacci system, and the D��Alembert strategy.

All of these betting systems are very straightforward to implement in blackjack. You simply need to add or subtract the appropriate amount of your bets based on the result.

Tips for Sustaining and Growing Your Blackjack Bankroll

If you want to grow your blackjack bankroll over time, you can also focus on minimizing additional things that can negatively affect it. Here are a few things you should pay attention to in order to sustain and grow your blackjack bankroll:

Avoid Common Mistakes

Although blackjack is a fairly straightforward game, there are many ways to play it suboptimally through various mistakes. Here are a handful of blackjack tips for avoiding mistakes that could drain your bankroll:

• Taking blackjack side bets like insurance
• Splitting tens
• Splitting fives
• Playing 6:5 blackjack instead of 3:2 blackjack

When it comes to gameplay-related mistakes, a good way to practice avoiding them is to play free blackjack online and practice without risking your bankroll. Additionally, when you start playing for real money, consider using a blackjack chart to guide you on when to make what decision.

Utilize Casino Promotions and Bonuses

If you��re playing online blackjack, a great way to grow your blackjack bankroll is to take advantage of the casino bonuses and promotions that online casinos offer. From welcome offers to bonuses for regulars and VIP perks, these rewards can come in handy and provide a helpful boost to your blackjack bankroll.

With that in mind, always make sure to read the terms and conditions before claiming a casino promotion. This will enable you to know how much you need to bet and how many times you need to wager through the bonus before turning it into real money and adding it to your bankroll.

Track Your Results

Additionally, consider tracking your results, as this will give you a direct insight into how you perform at blackjack tables. Tracking your blackjack results helps you reach your goals by enabling you to adjust when you notice certain negative patterns that need changing.

This is a vital element of proper blackjack bankroll management but doesn��t have to include extensive data. It can be a simple spreadsheet covering essential information or a free phone app for tracking blackjack results.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Advanced Blackjack Bankroll Management Techniques

With all of the above in mind, no matter which strategy you use, the blackjack house edge is still against you. That said, card counting might be the only advanced strategy that can actually run the table around and give you an edge.

Through practice and mastering card counting, you can effectively get an edge of around 1% with this technique. Of course, it��s also important to consider that casinos don��t allow this, and you will likely be banned if you get caught counting cards.

Nevertheless, if you want to start counting cards, it��s essential to be aware of the variance that comes with it. The variance represents the difference between the advantage card counting produces and the actual results. Variance goes hand-in-hand with standard deviation and can dent your blackjack bankroll even when you��re playing perfectly. Factoring in these two aspects is essential to any serious player.

Sustaining and growing your blackjack bankroll is no easy task. That said, with everything we��ve covered on this page, you can rest assured that you learned the most effective blackjack bankroll strategies and tips that will help you boost your game and improve your long-term results.

Frequently Asked Questions

How Much Should I Spend on Blackjack?

There��s no set amount you should spend on blackjack, as it all depends on your overall budget. The best practice is to set aside the amount of money that you can afford to lose without enduring any financial strain from your blackjack activities.

Can I Start with a Small Bankroll?

Yes, you can start playing blackjack with a small bankroll. However, it��s essential to properly size your bets according to your bankroll. A good rule of thumb is that your bankroll should be at least 30x to 40x the size of your average bet, while many blackjack players even increase this to 100x or more.

What is the Best Way to Build a Blackjack Bankroll?

The best way to build a blackjack bankroll is to have a long-term focus. Set the bankroll amount you can afford, implement a blackjack bankroll strategy, and play patiently, applying the optimal strategy. Utilize casino bonuses whenever available to boost your blackjack bankroll.

Title Image credit: Shutterstock

• A 4 bet in poker is an aggressive preflop betting move that can help you force other players to fold and claim the pot before the flop is dealt.
• The 4 bet in poker is most commonly found in deep-stacked cash or online poker games, where the players will have a large enough chip stacks to sustain this kind of bet.
• A 4 bet should be saved for your strongest poker hands, like pocket aces, where you are sure that a significant pre-flop bet is going to go your way.
• The primary aim of a 4 bet in poker is to quickly force up the pot value when you’re dealt the ‘nuts’ while also forcing players with weaker hands to fold.

A 4-bet in poker is a raise that follows a 3-bet, and it is usually done before the flop. The first raise is also known as a 2-bet (although the term is rarely used). The next player raising this initial raise is making a 3-bet. Finally, if another player or the player who made the initial raise raises again, this move is called a 4-bet.

The 4-bet is a part of advanced poker strategy and not something most beginner players have in their arsenal. However, to be a winning player in the world of online gambling and move up the stakes, you need to understand the pros and cons of this aggressive move, when to use it, and how to structure it for the best results.

In this article, we��ll discuss many different aspects of a 4-bet in poker, cover what a 4 bet is, when to use it, and how it factors into your overall poker strategy.

What is a 4 Bet in Poker: The Basics

A 4-bet is primarily a preflop move, defined as a raise that follows a 3-bet. It can be done by the player making the original raise or any other player in a hand left to act after the 3-bet.

The 4-bet in poker is usually indicative of a lot of poker hand strength before the flop, signaling that the player is willing to play for their entire stack. Of course, when used correctly, this isn��t always the case, as good players will have some 4-bet bluffs in their arsenal.

Unlike 3-bet, which is a fairly common part of poker strategy, 4-bet isn��t nearly as present, largely due to the fact that many games, especially tournaments, aren��t played deep enough to warrant this move and allow players to use it and still have chips left behind.

A Poker 4 Bet Example

Let��s look at a typical poker tournament situation, similar to the WSOP, with about 60 big blinds effective. This example also applies to online games, like video poker or live dealer poker.

Player A raises to 2.5 big blinds, and the big blind player 3-bets to 9 big blinds.

Even if player A goes for a very small sizing and 4-bets to only 20 big blinds, if the big blind player calls, there will be 40 blinds in the pot, and both players will have a pot-sized bet left behind, not leaving much room for post-flop play.

For this reason, you��ll encounter a 4-bet much more frequently in deep-stacked cash games, where players have 100 or more big blinds to start a hand, allowing for much more maneuvering space.

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

When Should You Use a 4 Bet in Poker?

As one of the strongest preflop moves, a 4-bet should be used sparingly. First and foremost, you��ll almost always want to 4-bet with your absolute best poker hand, like pocket aces and pocket kings. These are the best starting hands in, for example, live dealer casino Hold ��Em, so your goal is always to get as much money into the pot preflop as possible.

Another good value 4-bet candidate is AK suited, as this is the strongest unpaired hand. However, when playing extremely deep (over 200 big blinds), many good players will play this hand as a call, although a lot will depend on the situation and the opponent they��re up against.

You can 4-bet your absolutely best hands against everyone. However, against very aggressive players, you can expand your 4-betting range to include other strong pocket pairs like Queens and Jacks, AQ suited, and AK off.

If you perceive your opponent��s 3-betting range as too wide, 4-betting with these hands is a +EV move, as you��ll be well ahead of them before the flop.

4 Bet Bluffing Considerations

When it comes to bluffing, there are a few things you need to consider:

• Are you deep enough for a 4-bet bluff �C As we��ve already discussed, in some scenarios, a 4-bet will commit you to the pot, and if this is the case, you should not be bluffing.
• Is your opponent 3-betting wide enough �C If they��re very tight and only 3-betting with the top of the range, it��ll be hard to come up with a profitable 4-bet bluffing range.
• Are you comfortable playing a big pot on the flop and later streets �C When you 4-bet bluff and get called, you need to be comfortable with playing a big pot and potentially pulling some expensive bluffs by the river. If your only plan is to win the pot before the flop, you��re not ready to start 4-bet bluffing.

We��ll talk about a 4-bet as a bluffing tool in a minute, but these are some things to keep in mind when figuring out whether or not to go for it, whether for value or as a bluff.

What is 4 Bet in Poker: Common Mistakes & Pitfalls to Avoid

When it comes to poker 4-bets, there are a few common poker mistakes that players fall victim to, and while it may take some experience and practice to eliminate these, it can certainly be done.

The first and perhaps the most expensive one is misjudging the opponent��s 3-betting range. Some players are quick to read their opponents as too loose, leading to them expanding what they believe is a value 4-bet range against that opponent.

The fact of the matter is, if you want to expand beyond the hands we��ve just discussed, you��ll need to have a very specific reason and have a very good read on the particular opponent. If you have a lot of history with them and know they��re capable of 3-betting with absolute trash, then you can do it, but don��t be quick to make such determinations after playing just a few dozen hands against them.

4 Bet Poker Mistakes to Avoid

Some other common mistakes players make with their 4-bets are:

• Using too big of a sizing �C When you 4-bet, you are already conveying a lot of strength. You don��t need to go huge unless there is a very specific reason for it (i.e., your opponent will call with a weak hand). Going about 2.2x the size of the 3-bet is usually more than enough to accomplish your goal while leaving you with enough chips behind to play on future streets when called.
• 4-betting too small �C Even though you��re representing a big hand, you don��t want to just click back and allow your opponent to call with their entire range. Not only are you giving them great odds, but you��re also not doing anything to try and define their range if your bet size is such that they��ll call with 100% of the hands.
• Failing to account for other players in the hand �C Before you 4-bet, especially when doing it as a bluff, you need to consider other players left to act. If there are players with short stacks behind you, you should be less inclined to bluff, as these players can easily move all in, forcing you to call with what stands to be an inferior hand.

4-Betting as a Bluffing Tool

Good players will use 4-bet bluffs as a part of their overall poker strategy, but to do so efficiently, you��ll need to develop a good understanding of this move and get a lot of experience playing against different types of players.

When it comes to 4-bet bluffing, there are two typical scenarios that come to mind:

• Attacking players that you know 3-bet too wide
• Attacking players 3-betting from later positions or from the blinds, where their ranges will naturally be wider

When you recognize one of these spots, you need to figure out what poker hands are good 4-bet bluff candidates. Generally speaking, like with 3-bets, these will mostly be hands containing blockers and having decent potential to flop big, such as small suited pocket aces (A2s �C A5s).

To balance this out and make yourself less predictable, you��ll also want to include some other hands into your bluffing range. While there is a lot of theory behind this, some good candidates are middling-suited connectors like 78s or 89s.

These hands have good board coverage and can catch opponents off-guard, as they��ll have a hard time putting you on these types of hands in a 4-bet pot when a board comes favorable for you.

Image Credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Value Betting Using 4-Bets

We��ve already discussed that 4-bets are primarily used as a value-betting tool. When you have a big hand before the flop, 4-bet is one of the best ways to get more money into the pot, and you shouldn��t shy away from using it to achieve this very goal.

Some hands are standard 4-bets for value almost regardless of the situation, namely:

• AA, KK, QQ, Aks, AKo (frequently)

When you have one of these hands, you generally don��t mind getting a lot of chips into the pot before the flop is dealt. In fact, save for rare scenarios where stacks are extremely deep, these are the hands that you want to play for stacks against most opponents.

When figuring out what sizing to use, you��ll probably want to use a bigger 4-bet size with hands like AK and QQ and perhaps go smaller with AA and KK. This is simply because the latter is easier to play after the flop, and you will find more favorable boards with aces and kings.

Advanced 4-Betting Tactics

As you start incorporating more 4-bets into your play, you��ll realize there are many aspects to this part of poker strategy that aren��t covered in this article. This is because 4-bet is, by definition, a high variance move, which means you��ll end up playing more big pots.

Once you get the preflop part somewhat solved and figured out, you��ll need to dig into different post-flop aspects, figuring out when to continue with the aggression and what boards warrant checking and exercising some pot control. This can be tricky, as the natural tendency in 4-bet pots is to keep betting.

There is also a lot of meta game that goes into figuring out your 4-bet strategy, especially as you move up the stakes and encounter stronger players. What used to work at lower limits will no longer work, as these players will go beyond the fit or fold approach, even in 4-bet pots.

This shouldn��t scare you away from using 4-bets as a powerful tool that they are. With time, practice, and experience, you��ll become much better at all these different aspects, and any mistakes you make along the way are just a natural part of the learning process.

Title Image Credit: Anton27/Shutterstock

• Punto Banco is the most common variation of Baccarat card game.
• The rules are clear and easy to learn, making it a great entry game for Baccarat beginners.
• The goal of the game is to end with a card value of as close to 9 as possible.
• If the value of your cards hits double digits, only the last digit in the total is counted as the hand value.
• Compared to Chemin de Fer and Baccarat Banque, Punto Banco has stricter rules on when the player and banker can draw a third card.

The Punto Banco card game is one of the three main variations of the Baccarat card game that are found at an online casino. It is the best-known and most-played version which is actually very straightforward and easy to learn.

This guide will cover everything you need to know about this exciting Punto Banco Baccarat game. From basic online gambling strategies and rules to more advanced tips and mistakes you should watch out for, this comprehensive guide outlines it all.

Keep reading to learn Punto Banco in just a few minutes!

Understanding Baccarat Punto Banco

Punto Banco is one of the four main baccarat variations, along with Chemin de Fer, Baccarat Banque, and Mini Baccarat.

Like the other variations, Baccarat Punto Banco is a card game comparing the strength of different cards with three possible outcomes:

• The Player winning the hand
• The Banker winning the hand
• A tie if both the Banker and the Players have the same total of points

By comparing Punto Banco vs Baccarat Banque and Chemin de Fer, we can also notice some differences between them. In the latter two variations, players can make choices and have a direct impact on the end result.

In Punto Banco, there are fixed drawing rules, meaning that the players don��t have any impact on the gameplay. The game is played with either six or eight decks.

Punto Banco Scoring

The goal of the game is to get 9 points in your hand or as close to it as possible. The Aces are worth one point, all face cards are worth ten points, and numbers have their face value.

Before the hand starts, you can bet on the Dealer or Player winning or on the tie.

Playing and Betting in Punto Banco

To help you be certain how a Punto Banco round should play out, let��s go over a quick step-by-step example:

1. The Players Place their Bets – Every player at the table chooses their bet. Once everyone who wants to participate has made the wager, the dealer will burn the top card and deal two cards to the Player and two cards to the Banker’s hand.
2. Comparing Hands – The Dealer compares the Player’s and Banker’s hands to see which hand has a total closer to 9. When comparing the two hands, the card totals in each hand are added. If a hand has a total of 10 or higher, the last digit in the total is counted as the hand value. For instance, if the Player’s hand is worth 15, it��s subtracted by 10, and the total is 5.
3. The Dealer Pays Out the Winners – If you bet on the Punto (the player), you will get an even-money 1:1 payout. If you bet on Banco (the banker) and win, you will get a 19:20 payout. This is also an even-money payout minus the 5% house commission. A winning bet on a tie will get you an 8:1 payout.

Punto Banco Card Drawing Rules

Baccarat Punto Banco also has precise third-card drawing rules. For the player, this includes drawing if their total is 5 or less. If they have a 6 or 7 total, they stand. For the banker, the rules are a bit more extensive:

• Banker stands if they have a total of 7.
• If the banker has a total of 6, they draw if the player��s third card is a 6 or 7.
• If the banker has a total of 5, they draw if the player��s third card is a 4, 5, 6, or 7.
• If the banker has a total of 4, they draw if the player��s third card is a 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, or 7.
• If the banker has a total of 3, they draw unless the player��s third card is an 8.
• Banker draws if they have a total of 2 or less.

Image credit: Shutterstock

Strategies for Winning And Punto Banco Odds

Since there aren��t any variables gameplay-wise, Punto Banco baccarat strategies are simple to follow. Primarily, the Banker bet is the best one to prioritize, followed by the Player bet. Due to its high house edge and low probability, the Tie bet is best avoided.

With this in mind, also consider that different bets will come with different house edge percentages. For example, the house edge on the Player bet is 1.24%, while on the Banker bet is just 1.06%. On the other hand, the Tie bet comes with a whopping house edge of over 14%.

Balancing Your Bankroll

Besides considering this, it��s wise to set a fixed bankroll before you start playing. There��s no precise amount you should have, but the general rule of thumb is to have a total bankroll of at least 100 to 200 times the size of your average bet. Having a decent bankroll that you��re comfortable risking will put you in the best position to focus on the game without worrying about losing too much money.

Although the Punto Banco card game is very simple, you can implement various techniques for a more systematic approach to maximize your winning chances. Primarily, this includes utilizing a betting system that will optimize your bets.

Additionally, you can try capitalizing on successful streaks and minimizing the impact of losses. With that in mind, don��t try to chase patterns or overanalyze them since all of it is purely random, but this can add some fun to the game.

Common Mistakes to Avoid in The Punto Banco Game

In addition to using various strategies to optimize your results when playing Baccarat Punto Banco, it��s also useful to be aware of the most common mistakes many players make. With that in mind, here are some potential pitfalls in Punto Banco you should watch for:

• Not Understanding the Rules – Punto Banco casino rules are fairly straightforward to learn. That said, many players make the mistake of betting without fully understanding all of the game��s rules. Make sure you understand the odds and payout percentages, especially if you want to explore some of the game��s many side bets.
• Choosing Bets With Poor Punto Banco Odds – In line with the previous mistake, the types of bets you place will directly impact your results. For most players who want to steer towards the maximum chance of winning, the simplest Punto Banco bets, such as the Banker and the Player bet, are the best ones to stick with.
• Betting Impulsively – This baccarat variation is exciting, and it can be easy to get carried away and play impulsively. This is why it��s crucial to always play with a clear head and not let your emotions interfere in your decision-making process when making bets.

Advanced Techniques and Approaches For Punto Banco

As you master the basics of the Punto Banco card game, you might want to explore advanced Baccarat strategies that will allow you to take a more hands-on betting approach. This primarily pertains to finding the best betting system based on your personal preferences.

There are many betting systems to choose from, so it��s essential to pick the one that works best for you. In short, advanced betting systems can be divided into two main groups.

Punto Banco Card Game Betting Systems

The first is positive progression systems, which involve increasing your wager after a win. A few examples of such betting systems are the Paroli system and the 1-3-2-6 system.

The second is negative progression systems, which dictate increasing wagers after losses. These include systems such as the Martingale, Fibonacci, D��Alembert, and Labouchere systems.

On a different note, a popular advantage technique like counting cards won��t be very effective in baccarat, especially with the Punto Banco game variation. Unlike blackjack, Punto Banco will produce very linear results, meaning that there aren��t any cards that can significantly sway the outcome in the player��s or banker��s favor.

For this reason, counting cards can theoretically produce a small advantage compared to not doing so, but not substantial enough to deliver significantly higher profitability as it can do in blackjack.

Image credit: Shutterstock

FAQ Section

1. What sets Punto Banco apart from other Baccarat variations?

The main difference that separates Punto Banco from Chemin de fer and Baccarat Banque is that in the latter two variations, players can make choices during the game. In the Punto Banco casino game, this feature is absent, as the players�� moves are controlled by the cards they get dealt.

2. How can players increase their chances of success in Punto Banco?

The best way to increase your winning chances in Punto Banco is to stick with simple bets with good Punto Banco odds, such as the Player and Banker bets. Additionally, setting an objective and having a bankroll will help you play responsibly and make the most of your money.

3. Is card counting effective in Punto Banco?

No, card counting isn��t very effective in Punto Banco. Due to the game��s rules, the edge you would get by counting cards in Punto Banco is negligible. It��s better to focus on other advanced betting techniques that will help you increase your profitability.

4. Are there any specific rules or customs unique to Punto Banco?

In Punto Banco, the casino banks at all times and there are fixed drawing rules. Moreover, while the Player and Banker designations are still present, players can��t make any drawing choices, so the game is entirely chance-based.

5. How can players practice and improve their skills in Punto Banco?

After learning how to play baccarat, players can practice free baccarat online. This is the best way to improve their skills before playing it at a real money casino, as many online casinos offer the game in demo mode.

6. What are common misconceptions about Punto Banco that players should be aware of?

The most common misconception is that Punto Banco is a complex game and that it��s difficult to learn, which is far from the truth. Another popular myth surrounding casino Punto Banco is that it��s primarily for high rollers. While this was correct centuries ago when it was invented, it isn��t true today.

A Deep Dive into the Strategic Game of Punto Banco

Punto Banco is undoubtedly a glamorous and exciting game that will leave you feeling like James Bond, especially if you play it in the thrilling atmosphere of a live casino venue. Better yet, it��s a very easy game to jump into and you can already start playing it after reading this guide.

Unlike the other two main baccarat variations, Chemin de fer and Baccarat Banque, this one doesn��t require any decision-making on the player��s part. This makes it easy to play with confidence even as a beginner, as everything is entirely luck-based.

With that in mind, make sure to remember the rules, tips, and strategies we shared with you in this article. Equally as important, be aware of the common mistakes, as this will help you ensure maximum profitability when playing Punto Banco.

Image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

• Chemin de Fer baccarat is one of the oldest forms of baccarat still being played.
• The aim of a round of Chemin de Fer object is to reach a total 9 with a hand of two or three cards.
• When the card vales in Chemin de Fer baccarat reach double digits, the first digit is ignored. So the 1-9 numbered cards are worth their face value, while the the 10 and the face cards are worth zero. An ace is worth one.
• Players bet against each other in a real money baccarat Chemin de Fer game, instead of against the dealer.
• In the Chemin de Fer card game, the first two cards are dealt face-down, so the players don’t know which cards their opponent has.
• Unlike standard baccarat, players take turns being the bank, with the dealer, who represents the casino, only being there to facilitate the game.
• When the cards are revealed at the end of the round, the player with the highest total wins.

Chemin de Fer baccarat is one of the three main variations of the casino card game baccarat and is the oldest modern version played to this day. This baccarat variation shares many similarities with Punto Banco, Mini Baccarat and Baccarat Banque, but there are some differences you should know before you start playing.

Albeit not the most popular baccarat variation, Chemin de Fer is still a player favorite in many countries, especially in Europe and Latin America, and is a favorite among online baccarat players because of its quick pace.

This comprehensive Chemin de Fer guide covers everything you should know about this exciting and intriguing game.

Chemin de Fer Baccarat: Understanding The Basics

Although historians claim that the origins of baccarat date back to the 15th century, the earliest reliable information dates to 19th-century France, precisely the time and place where Chemin de Fer first emerged.

Chemin de Fer baccarat is the earliest two-person baccarat variation, as Baccarat Banque was invented as a three-person game, while Punto Banco came after.

Chemin de Fer in French stands for ��railway,�� referring to the fastest mode of transportation at the time. This is because the Chemin de Fer game was faster and more streamlined than similar previous versions.

Chemin de Fer rules differ from those of Punto Banco, the most popular online baccarat variation. The biggest and most significant difference is that Chemin de Fer involves a skill element. In Punto Banco, there are strict baccarat rules as to when the players can and cannot draw the third card. In Chemin de Fer, players are free to decide this on their own, meaning that their decisions directly influence the result.

Another difference that makes Chemin de Fer more complex than standard Punto Banco baccarat is that the cards are dealt face-down in this variation. This enhances the strategic element of the game, as players can��t see what the Banker��s card total is until the end of the round.

Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Playing, Betting, and Etiquette in a Chemin de Fer Game

Chemin de Fer has a very simple and easy-to-follow structure. That said, to make sure you understand how betting works in Chemin de Fer, here��s a quick step-by-step guide on how to play Chemin de Fer baccarat:

1. Betting Round – Before the dealer distributes the cards, the players place their bets. This is where Chemin de Fer differs from standard baccarat. In this variation, players take turns as the Banker and play against each other instead of the house. The dealer, who represents the casino, is only there to facilitate the game and make sure everything is in order.
2. Dealing the Cards and Drawing – The dealer will distribute two cards to the Banker and two cards to each player, all face-down. The dealer will then evaluate the totals, and the players will have the option of drawing the third card.
3. Comparing Hands and Paying out Winners – Once all players have decided on their move, the dealer compares the final card totals. A Player hand that has a higher total than the Banker wins the bet. If the Banker’s hand is the highest-valued one, all players lose. If there��s a tie, the bets stand for the next hand.

Strategies for Winning at The Chemin de Fer Card Game

Apart from understanding how a typical Chemin de Fer baccarat round plays out, there are additional strategic considerations you should be mindful of to play more optimally. This primarily includes knowing when to hit and when to stand:

• The optimal strategy is to accept a third card whenever you have a total of 0 to 4 and to never get a third card if you have a total of 6 or 7.
• If you have a total of 5, you can decide either way, although most Chemin de Fer players opt for taking the third card in this situation.

In addition to the gameplay itself, your bankroll management strategy can also have a significant impact on your overall Chemin de Fer experience. It��s crucial to set a fixed bankroll for playing Chemin de Fer.

A simple rule of thumb is to have a bankroll anywhere from 100 to 200 times the size of your bets. In other words, if you��re betting $5 per round, you should have a bankroll of at least $500 to $1,000. You’ll also want to look for table stakes that fit your bankroll.

Common Mistakes to Avoid in a Chemin de Fer Baccarat Game

Just as it��s important to focus on optimal Chemin de Fer strategies, it is vital to be aware of the potentially costly mistakes that you��d want to avoid when playing this baccarat variation. With that in mind, we want to highlight a few of the most common mistakes Chemin de Fer baccarat players make:

• Straying From Basic Baccarat Strategy – As we outlined above, Chemin de Fer has some general guidelines that help you know when to hit and when to stand. Diverging from this simple baccarat strategy is a mistake that will result in suboptimal returns over time.
• Not Understanding Odds and Probabilities – A common mistake many beginner baccarat players make is not understanding the odds and probabilities of different bets. Knowing the relation of these two game elements is key to ensuring you make the most of your bankroll and avoid placing poor bets.
• Chasing Wins – This mistake is particularly prevalent among beginner Chemin de Fer baccarat players. Expecting to win every hand after a prolonged losing streak or betting in hopes that fortune will turn in your favor can be one of the costliest mistakes when playing this card game. To avoid this, make sure to stick to the bankroll you set and know when to stop playing.

Advanced Techniques and Strategies

Advanced Chemin de Fer players might want to employ more sophisticated techniques that involve exploiting various patterns. When it comes to this, the two most popular advantage techniques are card counting and edge sorting.

When it comes to the latter, edge sorting can be a very effective strategy for getting an edge in Chemin de Fer. However, casinos frown upon this technique and will most likely ban you if you get caught.

On the other hand, unlike in blackjack, the house isn��t as strict when it comes to counting cards in Chemin de Fer. However, the reason for this is that card counting in Chemin de Fer isn��t very effective.

Even though Chemin de Fer players can choose when they want to take the third card, counting cards doesn��t provide any discernible edge. This is primarily because the number ten card and face cards are worth zero points, which diminishes the importance of knowing when they will be dealt.

Image Credit: Clementinin/Shutterstock

Chemin de Fer Baccarat FAQ

1.   What is the Chemin de Fer meaning?

Chemin de Fer baccarat originated in 19th-century France. Translated from French, Chemin de Fer means ��railway�� or ��railroad,�� referring to the game��s sped-up gameplay compared to classic baccarat variations.

2.   How does Chemin de Fer differ from other Baccarat variations?

The main difference between Chemin de Fer and other standard baccarat versions like Punto Banco is the presence of a skill element. In Chemin de Fer, players can decide when they want to take the third card. This means that they have direct input on the outcome and don��t have to play according to strict drawing rules.

3.   Is there a strategy to consistently winning at Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

The smartest way to play the game is to use a Chemin de Fer betting system, have a dedicated gambling bankroll, and focus on betting on the Banker or the Player. That said, Chemin de Fer baccarat still involves a significant degree of luck, so no Chemin de Fer strategy is guaranteed to provide consistent profits.

4.   What are the betting limits typically associated with Chemin de Fer?

The Chemin de Fer betting limits primarily depend on the table you��re playing at. In online Chemin de Fer, this can be as low as $1 per bet. On the other end of the scale, the maximum betting limit in live casino venues and online live dealer baccarat can be several hundred dollars or more per hand with additional baccarat side bets.

5.   How can players practice and improve their skills in Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

The best way to practice Chemin de Fer is to play free baccarat online. Most online casinos offer the option of playing these real money games for free in demo mode. This enables players to practice for as long as they want before depositing money and playing for real cash.

6.   Are there any specific rules or customs unique to Chemin de Fer Baccarat?

Chemin de Fer differs from other baccarat variations like Punto Banco in that it involves more skill, as players can decide when they want to take the third card. Additionally, it differs from Baccarat Banque, where the casino always acts as the Banker.

Playing Baccarat’s Fastest Variation

Chemin de Fer is not a difficult game to learn, but it is more challenging than its more prevalent Punto Banco counterpart. This baccarat variation involves a skill element, so it requires practice and a good understanding of all of the gameplay components.

Nevertheless, with the information we��ve provided you with above, you can be certain you��ve covered every important aspect of the game.

With that in mind, before playing Chemin de Fer baccarat, make sure you understand all of the rules, set a fixed bankroll, and pick a betting strategy that works best for you. Doing this will enable you to enjoy the fun and excitement of Chemin de Fer while playing the game optimally.

Title Image Credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

• Not all casino games are created equal �C some offer better odds for players, such as Blackjack and Craps which are known for their lower house edge.
• Casino games like Blackjack are strategy-based, often offering a house edge as low as 1% or 2% if the player uses optimal strategy.
• On the flip side, other games known for their entertainment value rather than good odds, such as Keno and Slot Machines, often have a higher house edge.
• Games with best betting odds are often more complex. For instance, Poker requires skill and strategy but offers better odds for experienced players.
• While playing games with the best odds can maximize potential winnings, it’s important for players to gamble responsibly and consider the entertainment value of the game.

So if you��re looking for games with the best odds, you want to look for games that have the lowest house edge. Games with a lower house edge pay out more on average over time compared to games with a higher house edge.

Let��s take a look a some of the games that offer the best and worst odds of winning so you��re all set for your next trip to Sin City, or if you’re planning a staycation with a little recreational online gambling.

Casino Games With The Best Odds

1. Baccarat – House Edge 1.06-1.24%

Baccarat is a simple game with a very small house edge for the casino, making it one of the best games to play. All you have to do is bet whether the “player” or the “banker” wins the hand, and if you guess right, you will double your initial wager. 

You should avoid betting on the tie since it has a 14.36% house edge, compared to only 1.06% when betting on the banker and 1.24% when betting on the player.

Read more about baccarat strategy.

2. Blackjack �C House Edge 0.5�C2%

Although in blackjack you��ll need to understand the rules and a basic strategy, whether you win or not relies on the luck of the cards drawn.

If you��ve never played, it��s a very easy game to pick up.

You��re looking to score 21 or get as close to 21 as possible with your cards without busting, and without the dealer having a higher total.

Read more about blackjack’s house edge.

3. Video Poker �C House Edge 0.5�C5%

Video poker is played on machines at the casino, against the machine – rather than other players. While this does cut down on some of the skill aspects of poker, like bluffing or learning other players tells, poker still has one of the lower house edges.

You can also play online video poker.

4. Craps �C House Edge 0�C5.56%

In craps, you��re betting on the outcome of a roll of two dice by one of your fellow players, the ��shooter��.

The ways to win are slightly more complicated than blackjack, but you��ll pick it up within a few rolls.

The house edge varies in craps, depending on the bets placed. Always check an individual casino��s odds and payout tables before playing.

5. Roulette �C House Edge 2.7-5.26%

Another simple game of chance with pretty good odds of winning is roulette.

The ball rolls, it falls into a numbered slot on a wheel, either you picked the number �C or group of numbers, or high and low, odd or even, red or black �C or you didn��t.

It is also worth mentioning that there are multiple roulette variations. The most popular is European roulette, which has one zero field on the wheel and features a 2.7% house edge.

On the other hand, American roulette has a double zero field on top, which makes the house edge a whopping 5.26%, so you should definitely avoid it whenever you have a choice.

Image credit: Suzyanne16/Shutterstock

Casino Games With The Worst Odds

1. Slots �C House Edge 2�C15%

Slot machines are hugely popular with casino-goers because they��re easy to play, entertaining, addictive, and – if you get lucky – you can win a lot of money.

There is nothing you can do to improve your win rate, though, as they are totally random.

So if you want to gain an edge over the casino you should consider playing a game where you can actually use a strategy.

2. Wheel of Fortune �C House Edge 11%

In Wheel of Fortune, you bet on whether the wheel stops on $1, $5, $10, $20 or a joker.

But even if you bet that the wheel will land on a $1 mark (the safest bet), the house edge is 11%.

Bet on a joker and the house advantage is as high as 24%.

3. Keno �C House Edge 20�C40%

In Keno there are 80 numbers. The house picks 20 and you win according to how many of that 20 you selected.

Just don��t start looking at the actual mathematical probabilities involved; they will make your eyes spin like one of those slots we just talked about.

This is usually the worst game to play at the casino in terms of your odds of winning, so if you do play, know that you��re unlikely to win. Ever.

Go For Entertainment, Not To Make Money

Look, you��re in Las Vegas to have fun.

Maybe you��ve saved up for a trip of a lifetime and you know the money in your pocket won��t be there when it��s time to head to the airport.

But it��s definitely worth looking out for games that��ll help your cash go a bit further.

• A 3 bet is the 3rd bet in a poker round, when a player raises on the 2 bet in poker, or the initial preflop raise.
• This happens when one player bets, another player raises, and then either the original bettor or another player makes another raise. This second raise constitutes a 3 bet
• In Texas Hold ‘Em and Omaha Poker, the blinds are considered the first bet, which is why the second raise is a ‘3 bet’
• For example, if one player raises to $15 before the flop, and the other player makes it $45, the player raising to $45 is making a 3-bet.
• Preflop betting is a huge part of poker strategy. This guide will take you through exactly what poker 3 bet is, how the value of your poker hands factors into your decision making, and how to build and implement a three bet in poker strategy.

A 3 bet in online poker is a a raise made after another player has made a raise already. Although the expression is often used to describe pre-flop action, a poker 3 bet can also happen after the flop.

During a poker game, 3 betting is an important part of poker strategy, from video poker to live dealer poker, allowing players to increase their aggression levels, resulting in winning more pots when bluffing and scooping bigger pots with the best value poker hands.

Figuring out when to 3 bet in poker, how to size your 3 bet poker properly depending on a situation, and what poker hands to pick can be tricky, but it is essential on your path to becoming a successful and profitable poker player in the long run.

What is a 3 Bet in Poker: The Basics

If you��re new to the game of online poker, the definition in the introduction will give you an idea of a 3 bet is and how it works. However, the definition alone doesn��t explain what makes this bet different from other bets and why it��s so important to develop a deep understanding of this concept.

There are several main goals that we want to achieve when placing a 3 bet in poker, and we can accomplish two or more of these with a single bet:

• Taking control of the betting �C When you 3 bet in poker before the flop, players who stick around will usually call, giving you control of the betting on future streets.
• Hand protection �C When you have a strong hand, 3 bet poker helps you reduce the number of players to the flop, making it easier to realize your equity.
• Isolating weak players �C You can use 3 bet poker to target weak players and attack their raises, ensuring you play them heads-up by removing other players from the pot.
• Making you harder to play against �C If other players know that you are capable of 3 betting, they��ll be less likely to attack your blinds, and when they do, they��ll have to fight harder for the pots.

Like with every other aspect of poker strategy, such as ICM in poker, finding a good balance is crucial. You want to 3 bet at the right frequency and with the correct poker hands to make the most out of this move.

Most players don��t do it enough, but there are also those who make one of the top 10 mistakes in poker, 3 betting too often, leaving them exposed to observant opponents who��ll take advantage of this tendency.

Image credit: Andrew Angelov/Shutterstock

What Does 3 Bet Mean in Poker: Purpose & Strategy of a 3 Bet in Poker

A 3 bet in poker is one of the most powerful moves when it comes to pre-flop betting. In many lower-stakes games, players don��t know how to properly respond to it, and very few have balanced 4 betting ranges. This means that a good 3 betting strategy can give you a big edge.

By attacking a pre-flop raise, you��re conveying a message that you have a strong hand, allowing you to pick up the pot right then and there or proceed to the flop with an advantage.

On high-card boards, you��ll have a range advantage, and on lower and middling boards, you��ll still have some coverage because of a balanced poker strategy that doesn��t include just the best poker hands.

When deciding whether to play 3 bet poker or not, there are a few things to look at:

• The raiser table position �C A player raising from a late position will usually have a weaker range, which means you can attack it with a wider scope of poker hands. Conversely, an early position raise conveys more strength, which should lead to a tighter 3 betting range.
• Your hand �C Your hand is important when deciding whether to 3 bet. Some of your strongest holdings will want to 3 bet almost always, while other poker hands are good candidates for light 3 bets, especially against late position openers.
• Stack sizes �C It��s important to be aware of all relevant stack sizes and poker chip values when making a pre-flop 3 bet. If there are particularly short stacks still to act or the original raiser doesn��t have many chips behind, you should usually tighten your 3 betting range.

In addition to these general considerations, you should always think about any specific reads you have on the player whose raise you��re attacking.

If you know someone to be opening a very tight range in general, you��ll want to deviate from your standard pre-flop poker strategy and skip on some of the weakest theoretically correct 3 bets. By the same token, against players who open too frequently and have a wide opening range, you should be looking for opportunities to 3 bet in poker.

That said, always try to think beyond the pre-flop. If you know someone is sticky and will often call a 3 bet to see the flop, you should increase your frequency when in position and avoid some of the marginal 3 bets when out of position.

What is 3 Bet Poker: Types of 3 Bets

We��ve already talked about some of the main goals we want to achieve when 3 betting. With these goals in mind, 3 bets can be divided into three main groups:

• Value 3 bets – These are 3 bets done with the strongest part of our range, like big pocket pairs, AK, and AQ. What exactly our value poker 3 bet range looks like will depend on the position where the raise is coming from, and any reads we have on the player. For example, pocket 9s are a value poker 3 bet against a button open, but we can��t raise with them for value against a reasonable UTG (under the gun) raise.
• Bluff 3 bets – Certain poker hands play very well as bluffs before the flop. Some of the best bluffing 3 bet candidates are small suited aces because of their ability to flop flush and straight draws, which allow you to put a lot of pressure on your opponent.
• Semi-bluff 3 bets – When talking about semi-bluff 3 betting poker hands, we��re talking about post-flop situations. With certain drawing hands, you��ll want to go for a 3 bet poker to put the maximum pressure and try to win with aggression while still maintaining some equity if you get called.

What is a 3 Bet in Poker: Important Factors to Consider

Armed with the answer to ‘what is a 3 bet in poker?’ what its main goals are, and the three major types of 3 bet, we can now move on to the most important part: the implementation.

It is one thing to say that it��s good to 3 bet because it helps us improve our aggression and win more pots. It is an entirely different thing, though, to figure out when to 3-bet in poker and what are some of the most important factors to pay attention to besides the one we��ve mentioned earlier.

Poker Game Dynamics

Game dynamics will play a huge role in how you construct your 3 betting ranges. While you can use GTO charts as your starting point, you shouldn��t be following these blindly, especially in lower stakes and live games, where players often have pronounced tendencies that you can take advantage of.

When figuring out your pre-flop strategy for a particular poker table at a casino, you should first figure out how that table plays overall. Are general tendencies more passive or are they on a more aggressive side? Are players opening a lot of hands, are there many callers before the flop, etc.?

This also applies to games of online poker, live dealer poker, or video poker. The same poker strategies apply to digital games as much as local casino games.

This information will help you create an idea of what their tendencies are and what their hand ranges look like. Based on this knowledge, you can make adjustments to your 3 betting strategy, adding or removing hands and deciding if including some of the marginal poker hands makes sense or if you should stick to a tighter, more straightforward approach.

Player Stack Sizes

Likewise, you should also be aware of stack sizes, especially in tournaments, where this is one factor that changes constantly.

Perhaps the player to your left has been on a 50+ big blind stack for the entire poker tournament, but they had just lost a huge hand, and now they are down to just seven or eight big blinds. This is something you have to consider when deciding whether to 3 bet light, as you��ll be committed to calling that player��s all-in once you 3 bet.

In cash games, you won��t often have to deal with short stacks, but you should be careful when entering pots against extremely deep-stacked opponents. When 3 betting in these situations, you need to have a solid plan for future streets and a general idea of how you want to proceed in a pot when you miss or make a marginal hand.

It doesn��t take that much for a pot to balloon out of control, and it usually starts with a 3-bet before the flop, so you must always be very aware of all stack sizes and seriously consider them when making your decisions.

Image credit: Vasilchenko Nikita/ Shutterstock

Common Mistakes to Avoid When 3 Betting

Playing aggressive poker at a online casino isn��t just effective. It��s also fun and exciting, so it��s not hard to fall into the trap of taking things too far. To help you avoid these situations, here are a few common mistakes and pitfalls to avoid when it comes to 3 betting:

• 3 betting too much against early position opens – Unless you have a very specific reason to think otherwise, you should respect early position opens and only go after them with very strong poker hands. This is especially true when you are in an early position as well and have several players to act after you. Many players tend to forget about other people involved in a hand and focus only on the original opener, which can be a costly mistake to make.
• Not balancing properly �C When 3 betting, you have to make it difficult for your opponents to put you on a hand. If you��re 3 betting only with your strongest poker hands, good players will quickly pick up on it. Instead, you want to use what��s known as a ��polarized�� range, which includes your best hands but also a decent number of weaker hands.
• Using a bad sizing �C It��s very important to use a proper size when 3 betting. While there is no one magic number, you want to make the 3 bet big enough so that it��s not an automatic call for your opponent with their entire range. This is especially true when 3 betting out of position, as you almost never mind picking up the pot on the spot. When playing deep-stacked, good players will often use big 3 bet poker sizes to make it harder for their opponents to call and to send a clear message that if they do call, they might end up playing for the stacks by the river.

For example:

If you��re playing 200 big blinds deep and face a cutoff raise in the big blind, you will often want to 3 bet with a hand like Ah5h. But if the cutoff opens to 3 BBs (big blinds), you should 3 bet to at least 10, and maybe even 12 big blinds.

Anything smaller will make it an easy call for a player in position, and that eliminates a big part of the reason you��re 3 betting in the first place, i.e., to win the pot without going to the flop.

Advanced 3 Betting Tactics

The concept of 3 betting in poker is a vast and very important topic, so this article, as long as it is, doesn��t nearly cover all of the different angles and nuances there are to this move.

With that in mind, we��ll quickly go over some advanced 3 betting tactics that can help nudge you in the right direction as you look to improve and solidify your pre-flop strategy.

Creating a Balanced 3 Bet Poker Range

We��ve mentioned a few times in this article the importance of a balanced 3 betting range, but what does this mean exactly? There isn��t a one-fit-all answer to this question, as what your 3 betting range looks like will depend on stack sizes, positions, and player tendencies.

Generally speaking, though, you want to have a range that has your good poker hands balanced out with enough weaker hands so that your poker strategy isn��t too predictable.

For example:

If you��re 3-betting hands like AK, AQ, KQs, and pocket pairs down to pocket 10s for value, you will want to include hands like KQo, A2s �C A5s, and some suited connectors into your 3 betting range to create a good balance.

Paying Attention to Poker Hand Frequencies

In addition to figuring out a solid range, you also need to think about frequencies. If a hand like KQo is in your 3-bet bluffing range, this doesn��t mean you��ll want to 3-bet with it every time. Maybe you��ll do it 70% of the time and fold it the remaining 30%. To balance this out, you��ll sometimes just call with your strongest poker hands like pocket Aces.

Combining 3 Betting With Other Post-Flop Strategies

In the ideal world, your opponents would be folding to all of your 3 bets, and you��d be printing money. In the real world, however, this doesn��t happen, and you��ll often have to play in 3 bet poker pots across multiple streets.

When devising your 3-bet poker strategy, you always need to have this in mind. The moment you make a 3 bet, you should be thinking about different scenarios and how you want to tackle them. What sort of boards will you be continuing on, what board textures are best to check on, and what, if any, opportunities there are to go for a check-raise?

When planning all this, you��ll have to think about more than just your hand. Your opponents�� ranges, tendencies, and stack sizes will play a huge role in how you devise your post-flop strategies in 3 bet poker pots, but those fall outside of scope of this particular article.

What is a 3 Bet In Poker: Your Questions Answered

• Is a 3bet better than an open raise? – The benefits of a 3 bet in poker over an open-raise is that a 3 bet will often force players with weaker hold cards out before the flop, reducing competition for the pot. With a good 3-bet, you might also pick up the entire pot preflop, which you cannot do with an open-raise.
• What is a linear 3 bet poker range? – A linear 3 bet range is a list of poker hands, in descending order a value, that are strong enough to 3 bet on. A linear 3 bet range is one composed exclusively of value-bets.
• What hands should I 3bet with? – As noted, there isn’t one straight answer to this question. It will depend on table dynamics, stack sizes, and whether you’re using polarized or linear betting ranges. Familiarizing yourself with all aspects of pre-flop betting is the best way to decide on which poker hand to three bet on at any given time.

Adding 3 Bet Poker to Your Poker Strategy

A poker 3 bet is one of the most powerful weapons in a player��s pre-flop betting arsenal. Knowing when to 3 bet, what hands to do it with, and how to properly size your 3 bets to get value and deny your opponents�� equity is essential to your long-term success in poker.

While we covered many important aspects of the 3 betting poker strategy in this article, the bulk of your knowledge and understanding will come from practice and analysis. Don��t be afraid to test different things against different players and then spend some time analyzing these spots.

A little free video poker is a great way to practice your 3-betting without spending a dime!

With time and practice, you��ll be able to pick up many interesting trends and flaws in both your and your opponent��s game, allowing you to improve and perfect your 3 betting poker strategy.

When used correctly, this can be one of the most powerful tools in your toolbox. Most players, especially those new to the game, are afraid of a poker 3 bet, whether when they have to face them or when they��re the ones who should use them. Break away from this pattern, develop an understanding of this important porker strategy concept, and you��ll quickly see significant improvements in your results!

Title image credit: Bordovski Yauheni/Shutterstock

• A “gutshot” in online poker is a hand in which a player is one card short of a straight, but the missing card is in the middle, not at either end.
• This is also known as an inside straight draw or belly buster, where the player needs to draw one of four cards to complete the straight.
• Gutshots are considered weaker poker hands because they have fewer outs (cards that will complete the draw) compared to open-ended straight draws.
• Betting or calling on a gutshot is often considered risky, but it can pay off if the situation is right, especially if this unexpected move can be used to mislead opponents.
• Understanding when to pursue a gutshot �� considering factors like pot odds, implied odds, and your opponents’ tendencies �� can elevate your poker strategy.

If you’re playing online poker, live dealer poker or video poker, or sat at your local casino, a poker gutshot draw is the weakest one out there, as you only have four outs that can help you. Yet, many beginners, who are just starting to learn poker, tend to overestimate a single gutshot and will often put way too many chips into the middle with this type of hand.

For this reason, it��s important to talk about poker gutshot draws and explain math and other strategic considerations behind them. Generally speaking, this is not a strong hand, but if you know how to play it correctly in different situations, it can be a profitable one.

What is a Gutshot Draw in Poker?

A gutshot straight draw is a straight draw that can only be completed with a specific card (four outs). For example, on a board of 3S 4D QD, a player holding 6H 7H has a gutshot, as only a five will complete the draw and turn it into a made straight.

Another example of a gutshot draw would be holding KA QS on a 9H 3H 5C board. In this example, you need one of the four Jacks from the deck to complete your draw, and this is what it is referred to as a single gutshot.

There are also double gutshot draws, but we won��t be covering them in this article, as their math is essentially the same as for open-ended straight draws. For example, if you have 6C 9C on a 5H 7H 3C, you can complete the draw with eight cards �C four 8s and four 4s, which is the same number of outs you have in an open-ended straight draw.

It is important to be aware of gutshot draws on the board and cards that can potentially complete them on turns and rivers. Poker beginners often miss these and end up paying their opponents when they hit because they fail to recognize a straight-completing card.

As already mentioned, a gutshot in poker is one of the weakest draws you can have. Your odds of making your draw from flop to turn are just 8.5%, and the odds of hitting one of the four cards you need by the river are 16.5%.

These low percentages indicate that you should never play a big bet with just a gutshot draw if you believe the only way of winning the pot is by making your hand. In these scenarios, when facing any bet that is 50% of the pot or larger, you should just fold and move on.

Interpreting Gutshots in Poker Play

For beginner players, a gutshot can be a rather confusing hand. Without understanding the math we��ve just explained, it��s hard to understand why these hands aren��t worth chasing after. After all, if you make your straight, you can get paid, right?

The problem is, compared to all other draws, a gutshot straight is the least likely one to come in. For example, an open-ended straight draw will fill in almost 32% of the time by the river. The odds of completing a flush draw are even higher at 35%.

Some of these hands, flush draws especially, also have other ��backup�� features, such as hitting a top pair that might also give you a winner. Gutshots usually lack these properties and hitting a top pair when you have a gutshot can often be a bad thing, as that same card could complete the opponent��s straight draw.

To illustrate, if you have 7C 8C on a 4C 6H JH board, when you improve to a top pair with an 8 on the turn, that same card completes the potential open-ended straight draw from the flop (any 5-7 combo), and depending on the action, this combination can easily be in your opponent��s range.

Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Playing Gutshot Draws Effectively

The first part of this article mainly focused on explaining what a gutshot is in poker and why you need to approach these hands very carefully and conservatively. However, with the right gutshot poker strategy, you can make these draws work for you.

There are a few things that you need to consider when you flop a gutshot draw:

• Am I in or out of position?
• Can I only win a hand by making a straight?
• If I make my hand, will I be able to win additional chips?

First of all, when you are out of position in poker, and you have a gutshot draw, I��d say that if you believe your only options are call or fold (when facing a reasonably sized bet), you��re always better off folding. Calling to try and hit an unlikely draw out of position isn��t a profitable strategy.

Sometimes, however, a gutshot straight draw can be a perfect hand to use as a check-raise bluff. On small and relatively connected boards, you��ll often have a range advantage as a player defending from the big blind. In these spots, using gutshots as semi-bluffs can be a valid strategy.

The main idea behind the move is to get your opponent to fold as you can credibly represent a strong hand. However, if they don��t, you still have some equity to fall back on.

For example, you face a hijack open and call from the big blind with 7S 8S. The flop comes 4H 5C 9D. When you check and they continue betting, you can credibly raise, as this is the board where you��ll have more sets, two-pair, and top-pair combinations. When you do get called, you can still hit a 6 to complete your draw.

Of course, it is important to find the right balance. You aren��t supposed to check-raise with 100% of your gutshots, and when you are in position, you can often just call and see what develops on the turn or river. When and if they give up, you can take a stab at the pot, depending on the texture, player tendencies, stack sizes, etc.

Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Common Mistakes With Gutshot in Poker

We��ve already covered some of the most common mistakes with gutshot poker draws, but it��s good to try and list them all in one place for reference:

• Calling big bets, especially out of position
• Investing too much money with non-nut draws
• Continuing in the pot when you miss your draw and hit a pair instead
• Taking an aggressive approach when the opponent is on a very short stack
• Not getting enough value from made draws

You need to assess every situation individually and decide what the best course of action is. It��s easy to go on autopilot and fall into the trap of playing automatically, but check-raising against an opponent who only has six or seven blinds left is usually not going to work.

Likewise, if you��re going to chase a gutshot, whether by calling or by playing aggressively, you need to have a plan to extract the maximum value when your draws come in. Because these hands do not materialize often, you must make the most out of them whenever they do.

Advanced Techniques for Handling Gutshot Draws

Successful poker players don��t look at any individual strategy in a vacuum. Instead, they study and implement it as a part of a broader game plan, and this is exactly what you should be doing with your gutshot poker strategy.

The approach of let��s call or raise and see what happens is not the correct one. Instead, you need to take a few moments to make your decision, and during that process, you��ll want to figure out how to play out the rest of the hand.

If you go for a check-raise with your gutshot, you��ll want to have a plan on what happens when different cards hit. Likewise, if you call a bet, you should have an idea of how to play out future streets.

For example, if you call with a gutshot on a 4S 5S JD board, what do you do if turn pairs a 4 or a 5? These are cards you can credibly represent, so these can be good opportunities to take over the betting lead or put in a turn check-raise.

This way, you��re not relying on just the luck of a draw to win the pot but are instead giving yourself other opportunities to take it down.

Of course, factoring in general population tendencies and any specific reads you have on a player will be very useful. You should be less inclined to take an aggressive approach against an opponent that you know is sticky and will not fold easily.

At the same time, this is the type of opponent that you want to try and make your draw against even if you aren��t getting immediate odds, as you know they��ll be willing to put more money into the middle when you hit.

These are just a few simple examples of how you can adjust your gutshot poker strategy. There are many different scenarios and many different types of players you��ll encounter, but as long as you keep in mind the basic principles of this hand, you should do just fine.

Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

Gutshot in Poker Examples & Hand Analysis

It��s always easier to understand certain theoretical concepts when looking at real-life examples, so here��s an interesting hand played by Jonathan Little featuring a gutshot straight draw.

• Jonathan starts off with AC 2C in the hijack and makes a standard 2.5x raise (blinds are 200/400). The button. The big blind call and the flop come 7D 4H 3C, giving him a gutshot and a backdoor flush draw.
• After the big blind checks, he decides to continue for 1,700, and only the button calls. The turn is the 9C, bringing in the flush draw as well. This is where the backdoor potential kicks in �C the hand isn��t just a gutshot, but it also has many cards that will allow it to keep betting.
• Now Jonathan bets 2,600, and the opponent calls once again. The river is the QC, completing the flush. Little goes for a massive bet of almost 19,000 into the pot of 12,500 to really put the opponent to the test.

This is a great example of playing a gutshot aggressively all the way through, realizing the full potential of the hand, and taking advantage of favorable turn and river cards.

If, however, Jonathan had a hand like AS 2S or AS 3S in this spot, without any backdoor opportunities, he��d probably take a much more cautious route, likely checking the flop against two opponents and giving up to any reasonable aggression.

Tips for Improving Gutshot Play

There are a few different ways to improve your gutshot poker strategy, but running simulations with these scenarios and looking at the numbers that come up is probably the best one.

When you do it enough, you��ll develop an understanding of how to tackle different board textures and play from different positions, realizing how often you should be bluffing with what types of hands and what hands are best played passively.

It goes without saying that seeking tips and advice from more experienced poker-playing friends can also help immensely. Since these can be very tricky spots, don��t be afraid to pick their brains and ask them what they think, as they can open your mind to some new possibilities that you��d never think of on your own.

The Gutshot Draw Unveiled: Elevating Your Poker Game with Strategic Insights

Gutshot straight draws are one of the most frequently misplayed hands in all of poker. Beginners make the mistake of overvaluing these hands, leading them to lose a lot of chips in spots where they had absolutely no need to do so.

Hopefully, this article will help deepen your understanding of the gutshot poker strategy and teach you how to get the most out of these draws. When navigated correctly, these hands can be profitable, especially against weaker competition that won��t be able to wrap their head around your play.

Keep on playing and studying, analyze different spots, and take advantage of different poker tools to help you develop the right strategies for gutshot straight draws, and it won��t take you long to start playing better than a large percentage of players in these spots.

Title Image credit: VITALII BORKOVSKYI/Shutterstock

• GTO Poker (Game Theory Optimal) and Exploitative Poker are two prominent strategies employed by professionals in both live and online poker. Both have distinct advantages depending on the situations and opponents.
• GTO Poker leverages mathematical models and game theory to make optimal decisions in every situation. It aims to create strategies that are unexploitable even by skilled opponents.
• Exploitative Poker, on the other hand, focuses on taking advantage of the opponents’ weaknesses and tendencies. It relies heavily on observing patterns in opponents’ play and then tailoring your strategy accordingly.
• The choice between the two often depends on the player’s skills, understanding of the game, and most importantly, the playing style of their opponents. A balanced approach can often be most beneficial.
• Ultimately, neither strategy is inherently “better”, but understanding and being able to implement both can give a player a substantial edge in diverse poker scenarios.

When thinking about the best approach to winning poker, there seems to be a lot of confusion about what Game Theory Optimal (GTO) in poker is, and whether it��s a better option than exploitative play in poker.

In reality, you don��t need to choose one of these options, but rather understand the basic principles of GTO play and when it should be applied.

In this article, I��ll try to go over every important detail to clear up any confusion, and I��ll start by explaining what GTO is and how it works in real-life scenarios.

What is GTO Poker?

Let��s start with the basics: What is GTO poker?

Game Theory Optimal (GTO) is basically when you attempt to play mathematically perfect poker, so that your opponents make mistakes against you. This strategy balances your value hands and poker bluffs in a way that leaves you unexploitable. 

Since the phrase has the word ��optimal�� in it, people often think that GTO in poker is a perfect approach that is better than anything else out there. But that��s not always true.

First of all, the GTO poker model revolves around the style of play that makes you unexploitable.

It means that if you were playing a true Game Theory Optimal, your opponents couldn��t find any way to take advantage of your style. No matter what they do. At best, they could break even.

On the flip side, though, the GTO poker approach is fairly rigid as it doesn��t allow for any adjustments. You��ll be following the same strategy against all opponents no matter what they do. So, while you can��t be exploited, you won��t be exploiting others, either.

GTO is often used in poker played in online casinos, because games like live dealer poker or video poker makes it harder to read your opponents.

The best way to explain this is through a simple example. If the GTO poker model dictates that perfect 3-bet size in a certain scenario is 13 big blinds, you��ll be 3-betting to that size regardless of who your opponent is.

Even if you��re up against a loose maniac who��ll gladly call a 30 big blind 3-bet when you have pocket Aces, you��ll not deviate from your standard strategy, and leave money at the table against that particular player.

So, clearly, there are some upsides and downsides to this approach, but before jumping into the details, I want to address another topic.

No-Limit Hold��em Hasn��t Been Solved Yet

If you hear the word ��optimal��, you immediately think of something perfect. However, there is still no such thing as a perfect poker strategy. No-Limit Hold��em is a game with many variables, and is yet to be solved, especially in non-heads up games.

Besides, even if there were a complete solution to NLHE, it would be way too complex to memorize for a normal human being. There is absolutely no way you could learn by heart what to do in every single situation.

If you had that kind of memory, you could probably earn much more money doing something else instead of playing poker.

So, GTO is very useful for learning basic principles and understanding why certain plays make sense. It��s good for building a solid strategy that you can implement against tough opponents.

But it��s not necessarily the best way to play poker in every possible scenario.

The Main Issues With GTO in Poker

The biggest problem that comes to mind when talking about GTO poker is actually learning it.

If you want to adopt this style of play, you��ll have to spend many hours analyzing different situations, working with solvers, reading strategy books and watching training videos.

But you won��t be able to remember all of that information and play a GTO strategy all the time.

However, this doesn��t mean that you shouldn��t study a mathematical-based approach. It can help you learn a fundamentally sound strategy for almost all scenarios, and is the perfect starting point against any competition.

That being said, GTO in poker isn��t always the most profitable one because it doesn��t take into account players�� stats, tendencies, or reads in live games.

For example, if you��re up against a very loose player who opens many hands preflop or makes huge c-bets on flops every time, playing GTO in poker won��t make much money against this particular opponent. You need to adjust to their style and take advantage of their mistakes.

Of course, you��d still be winning by sticking to GTO in this scenario, just not as much as you could.

Exploitative Play in Poker: Reading Into People��s Tendencies

The exploitative play in live poker has been around for much longer. In fact, some of the best in the game had used this style to win heaps of money over the years, long before the idea of GTO poker took hold.

It��s important to understand that exploitative play still means you have to play very strategically sound and solid poker. You still have to make good hand selection before the flop, be mindful of your position, and pay attention to pot odds.

But then you go one step beyond.

This is a style of play where you open yourself to being exploited but make more money by targeting your opponent’s mistakes instead of balancing your ranges.

Many weaker players are unable to readjust to these changes, so playing a GTO style against such an opponent would mean leaving money on the table.

Example of Poker Exploitative Play

Let��s look at an extreme example.

You sit down at a 2/5 table, and you don��t know any of the players, but you saw that one guy open-shoved five times in a row. Two times he got looked up and showed ATo and T9s. You can now be pretty certain this player is here to gamble.

This is where GTO considerations go out of the window, and you snap them off with pocket tens, AQo, or even weaker holdings. Their showing range is just so wide that it makes no sense to stick to GTO and keep folding as if they were playing normal ranges.

The same applies to a completely contrasting scenario.

If you��re up against an ultimate nit who never bets big without the nuts, you can safely fold even some of your strongest hands when facing such bets on the river from this particular opponent.

While this would open you up to being exploited by competent players, it��s fine to do against someone who pretty much has just one gear.

Of course, situations are rarely this clear cut in real life.

Sometimes, you can make bad assumptions or misread the situation and only hurt yourself trying to adopt exploitative play.

So when you��re not sure how to exploit your opponents, GTO play is your best option.

Are Poker GTO And Exploitative Poker Mutually Exclusive?

There also seems to be some confusion among players about having to choose either one or the other style and stick to it, which is completely false.  

As already mentioned, learning GTO basics is vital for learning solid poker strategy foundations.

After all, if you��re going to vary your styles and exploit your opponents, you need to understand where they��re making mistakes, which you can��t do without knowing the right strategy yourself.

Learning GTO (at least to some extent) is also very useful for situations where you find yourself at tough tables or against unknown players. For example, you could be seated at a tough table in a poker tournament with players that are better than you.

Here, resorting to GTO might be your best option as an exploitative poker strategy would probably hurt your chances of winning.

So, these two concepts are not mutually exclusive, and, ideally, you��ll want to learn both.

This will make you a much tougher opponent overall as you��ll be prepared to tackle different scenarios and able to adjust to new situations at the tables. Once again, you don��t need to try and learn the entire GTO by heart.

It would be an overkill and pretty much impossible to do. What you want to do instead is analyze some frequent scenarios to understand the balanced play in these spots.

This should give you a pretty accurate idea of what to do in similar situations to keep your ranges balanced and your play close to GTO.

More On Exploitative Poker Play: Adjusting & Readjusting

Like game theory optimal strategy the exploitative approach has its drawbacks, too.

While GTO has its foundations hardcore math, poker exploitative play is more about guessing your opponent��s tendencies. As you probably know, conclusions made at a poker table aren��t always perfect or even correct at all.

Earlier in this article, I gave an extreme example where switching to an exploitative approach would be +EV.

But, in real life, things usually aren��t as simple. You��ll have to make much thinner reads and find smaller leaks in players�� styles that you can use to your advantage. A problem with making these adjustments is that you often don��t have enough information.

Seeing someone play a few dozen hands can give you some idea about their tendencies and inclinations in particular spots, but you shouldn��t overvalue that type of info.

With a small sample size, it could still just be a coincidence.

For example, you could see a player 3-bet several hands in a short span. Your initial thought might be that they��re probably doing it with a wide range of hands and that you might adjust to it by opening fewer hands or starting to 4-bet them as a bluff.

However, it��s entirely possible that they��re just running hot and have been dealt with some really good hands in a short time span.

While the exploitative style can definitely be more profitable, you need to make sure the information you��re basing your adjustments on is solid. Don��t be too quick to draw conclusions.

Be Mindful Of Other Players During Exploitative Poker

Another drawback of the poker exploitative play is that it opens doors for you to be exploited.

For example, you could adjust to a loose opponent who opens many hands preflop by 3-betting them light in position.

Against that particular player, your play is perfectly reasonable and will result in profit in the long run. However, you can face some problems if you��re not playing heads up. If there are some other competent players at the table, they might take notice of what you��re doing.

If a good player realizes you��re isolating a weak opponent too often, they might come after you. Since you��re 3-betting light, you won��t be able to do much when they start 4-betting you.

So, when making your adjustments, it��s not just the player you��re targeting that you need to consider. You also have to think about others involved in the game and what they might do.

If you notice one or two of them are starting to change their style to attack your adjustments, you��ll need to recalibrate your strategy.

You don��t have to deal with any of this when using GTO, which is why this approach is so powerful. You just know what you��re going to do and don��t care about what others are doing.

Always Mix Things Up

So, to wrap this discussion up, will you be better off playing GTO or an exploitative poker strategy?

The answer is�� both!

Neither is better. Each serves a different purpose and depends on what kind of games you play.

In tough lineups, the GTO approach will usually work better as you��ll leave very little room for your opponents to take advantage of your plays.

In weaker games where your opponents aren��t paying as much attention and aren��t adjusting to your changes, you��ll make more money playing an exploitative poker strategy.

Since most of the time you��ll find yourself in situations with both weak and strong players at the table, you��ll be best off knowing both strategies.

That way, you can vary your style as needed and play exploitative strategy against weaker players to take full advantage of your mistakes and adopt the GTO approach against strong opponents to make sure they never get the upper hand.

Becoming a Professional Poker Player: Top Tips from a Pro

• Pick your poker game and stick to it – The best Poker pros specialize in one variation of poker. Most player choose Texas Hold ‘Em, but you can make a career playing Omaha poker or another variation.
• Learn it inside out – Once you choose your game, learn it from back to front, until you can recount pre-flop charts in your street.
• Put money and time into improving continuously, and take care of your soft skills – Don’t rest on your laurels. Always look for ways to improve your game and focus on your poker soft skills (which we’ll cover in this article).
• Don’t just focus on tournaments – Large scale tournaments, such as the WSOP, do attract a lot of pro poker players, but you can make a good living playing poker in an online casino. Online poker, live dealer poker, and video poker are, after all, still poker.

What’s Included in This Guide

• My story and what I learned on the way
• Step 1: Pick Your Poker Game and Be Consistent
• Step 2: Master Your Game & Know Your Odds
• Step 3: Invest in Your Education
• Step 4: Keep Learning
• Step 5: Take Care of Your Soft Skills to Stay on Top of Your Game
• Step 6: Manage Your Money Carefully
• Pros and Cons of Being a Professional Poker Player
• Becoming A Professional Poker Player �C Is It For You?

How do You Become a Professional Poker Player

Do not fool yourself: becoming a professional poker player in today��s competitive environment is not easy, but if you take it seriously, it can be well worth the efforts.

I had many ups and downs over the years, but playing online poker professionally was one of the best decisions I ever made in my life, and I never regretted choosing this path. However, if I had to start all over again, I would do many things differently to save years of wasted time and a ton of lost money on the way.

I am sure that you can easily avoid many of the poker mistakes that I made and speed up your progress. So, if you have a couple of minutes to read it through, I will be happy to share how I became a professional player and what I learned on the road.

How to Become a Pro Poker Player: Getting My Start

I started playing poker around 2008 when I was introduced to the game by my friends. At that time, it was hard to imagine how big the poker world really was, and that it offered much more than my home games with buddies.

But even that was enough for me. I fell in love with this game and never looked back.

Of course, there is no need to say that the beginning of my career was far from optimal. I played random sessions of Multi-Table Tournaments (MTTs), Progressive Knockout, and Sit-and-Go Tournaments (SNGs) online, plenty of cash games with my friends, and was not studying the game at all.

In the beginning, I loved competing with others and enjoyed the feeling of winning. With all honesty, it was not about the money. However, very soon, I realized that I could easily make much more playing poker than in a part-time job during my study years, and this idea fascinated me a lot.

At the time, I was struggling both financially and mentally because my father has just passed away. Poker helped take my thoughts off my situation, so I started grinding through days.

Starting Become a Pro Poker Player

The more I played, the more I liked the game. Unlike the ��real�� life, poker gave me control of everything. I could play when I wanted, what I wanted, for as long as I wanted – and I loved it.

When I look back, I think that I was incredibly lucky to discover this game. I am a very competitive person, and the ability to play with different pro poker players, adjust my strategy, and overcome them was very pleasing, probably even more so than money.

However, I have to confess that the beginning of my career was basically a gamble.

I had a very narrow understanding of the game and was not spending much time learning the strategy. Luckily for me, players weren��t that good back in those days, and I was making a very decent living even playing poorly.

And then I got lucky! One day changed my whole career.

In one of the live poker tournaments, I got to meet a professional poker player, and it changed my whole view of the game. He was talking in terms of ranges, breaking down poker math, poker ICM, and other concepts I barely knew existed.

That was the moment when I realized that there is so much more to the game. After that, I started studying like never before and rapidly improved my game.

Travelling the Poker Tournament Circuit

I joined a group of pro poker players, and we started traveling the world playing live cash games and occasional tournaments.

We visited WSOP in Las Vegas, many European Poker Tour stops, and other destinations in poker circuit. Now, I can easily say: meeting that PRO at the tournament was the best thing that ever happened to me in regards to poker.

I started getting coaching from one of the best pro poker players in my country, and my development boosted even more. We touched not only the strategy part, but also topics such as concentration, controlling emotions when bluffing, and other areas of the mental game, which once again made me realize how much I didn��t know.

After a year of traveling around and playing through the night in various local casinos, I decided that I didn��t want to do it anymore. Thus, I left the live games circuit and concentrated on playing at online casinos.

This is my path, but you can make much better decisions with a wide range of information available today.

If you want to play poker professionally, you can avoid a lot of my mistakes and speed this process by years. So what should you do? Let me try to answer this question by listing five steps that can drastically help you on your journey.

Image credit: Evgenyrychko/Shutterstock

How to Become a Professional Poker Player Step 1: Pick Your Poker Game and Be Consistent

At the beginning of my career, I tried playing different games simultaneously. I was launching MTTs and cash games at the same time, or even playing live cash and a table or two on my laptop.

Obviously, all of this looks ridiculous when I look back, and I believe it was one of the biggest roadblocks for improving as a player.

If you jump from one game to another, most likely, you will never become very good at either of it. Therefore, your primary job is to decide what you want to play and stick with that decision.

That being said, it does not mean that you can��t play cash games with your friends if you chose to play MTTs. Not at all, but you have to stick with one format as your main game and put all your concentration to it.

So how do you choose the game? Well, surely not based on possible income! You should pick the game which suits your situation and one you actually enjoy.

• If you do not want to play extremely long sessions or do not have the luxury to sit in front of your PC for hours without taking a break, MTTs are probably not for you.
• However, if you love the changing environment, different dynamics, and have all the time for playing �C tournaments are a great choice.
• If you require the flexibility to manage your time, then you should probably choose cash games.

All of the formats have pros and cons. So do your homework, choose what works for you and most importantly, stick with it.

For example, if you decide to play tournaments and spend time to study ICM strategies, learn optimal approach on the bubble, master different stack depth play and vital adjustments for different situations, jumping to cash games would not be very wise.

Sticking to one game will help you improve much faster because you can concentrate on learning what matters the most and gather your experience at a much better pace.

If you gain an edge in one format, it is much easier to keep it than learn a different game.

This is where I struggled a lot. I was jumping from one format to another for a couple of years, and it was holding me back. Now, I can easily say that the moment I chose my game and put all the effort to improve in that area, my results skyrocketed, and you likely should follow this path as well.

How to Become a Pro Poker Player Step 2: Master Your Game & Know Your Odds

When you know what you��re going to play, concentrate all your efforts into mastering it. Obviously, you should start by learning the rules if it��s is a new game, but soon after that, your next step should be conquering the math.

No matter what you play, poker is a game of math, and if you do not know your numbers it will be very hard to reach any kind of success, maybe even impossible.

How to become a professional poker player �C five essentials you need to know about your chosen game:

• Learn the odds of hitting a winning hand when you are behind.
• Figure out how to compare it against pot odds you are getting so you can make an educated decision if you need to continue with your holdings.
• Understand how implied odds work and the extra value they can add to your hand.
• Learn to count combos and frequencies so you can put your opponent on a range.
• And most importantly: learn to think in terms of ranges, not specific hands.

Assigning your opponent a specific hand instead of a range of cards is one of the biggest mistakes you can make, and one that almost everyone makes at the beginning.

When you understand frequencies and know how likely your opponent is to have one holding or another, you will be able to assign them a realistic range of cards and avoid the most common mistake.

You can easily do that if you observe all the action.

Start by analyzing the preflop situation and assign your opponent a specific range based on their position, the action they took, and bet sizing. Don��t worry if you struggle at the beginning, the more you play, the better you get at figuring out the exact holdings each of your opponents are likely to have.

After that, narrow down that range based on every action they take on following streets. If you do that correctly, at the end of the hand, you will always know where you stand.

You either have to call or raise their bet if your hand is ahead of their range, or fold if you are behind. As simple as that. This is where I made my second mistake, which wasted a lot of time and money.

I was simply playing and sticking with my assumptions without analyzing other professional poker players, or trying to put them on a range. So please, do not repeat my mistakes.

Never underestimate the value of fundamental knowledge, since it will always be your bread and butter when making decisions ?– and the most reliable source of information.

Image credit: Rawpixel/Shutterstock

How to Become a Professional Poker Player Step 3: Invest in Your Education

When you know your odds and the game inside-out, you should easily be winning in lower stakes games and can practice a lot without burning your bankroll.

However, if you��re looking for how to become a professional player, I guess you have much higher goals than that. This is great because your ambitions and goals will help you reach long-term success.

To boost this process, you have to invest in your education. I mean it literally. Obviously, you can get a lot of resources for free, but it will never be as good and most likely without any structure.

If you stick to reading random articles, watching Twitch streams or YouTube videos, it will probably never help you reach anything meaningful. I am not saying this just because I have a training site myself, but this proven to be true for many professional poker players, including myself.

Investing in Poker Coaching

My real progress started when I invested in my first coach, and big results came soon after that. I know plenty of such examples.

All top professional athletes and high performers require coaching and constant training. So, just like with anything else in life, you should not expect to reach exceptional results without investing in yourself at the beginning, and maybe even more so in poker.

A good course can help you save a lot of trials and errors time, and even money on the way. So I would recommend gathering as much information as possible, even if that means investing in several paid programs at the beginning.

How to Become a Professional Poker Player Step 4: Keep Learning

When you start playing and winning in serious games, do not make the mistake of thinking you know it all. It will never be the case.

There is no such thing as ��happily ever after�� in poker. It is a very challenging and dynamic game, meaning that the moment you stop improving, you will be falling back – and others will be quick to catch up.

You have to understand that if you are beating the games today, it definitely does not mean you��ll be beating same games tomorrow if you stop where you are.

Poker changes all the time. With many learning resources becoming available every day, pro poker players are getting better and better, new ones are joining the action, and they are hungry for the win.

How to become a professional poker player by keeping your skills sharp:

• Always analyze your game.
• Observe other players when playing.
• Mark hands that you are uncertain of how to play and discuss them with your friends or a coach.
• Join a training site or get a coach if you want to take it seriously.
• On top of that, work with poker solvers to learn game theory optimal (GTO) strategies.
• Use trackers and take poker notes to fine tune your play and identify population tendencies.
• Figure out the most profitable adjustments versus different professional poker players.

This list goes on and on. Basically, just try to become the best version of yourself every single day, and you will become excellent.

How to Become a Pro Poker Player Step 5: Take Care of Your Soft Skills

Many professional poker players lose a lot of money due to tilting, emotional decisions, or simply lack of concentration during the games. I like to call these ��soft skills��.

You��re only human, so while it��s not possible to completely stop these issues from affecting your games, you have to make sure you do everything you can to reduce them.

If you end up spewing one buy-in every session because of sub-optimal play, the results at the end of the month will not be something you want to see. Most of the time, this part could be a deciding factor between crushing the games and barely surviving.

Most professional poker players think that it is enough to prevent tilting or avoid playing when they��re feeling bad. While this is important, it is just a very small part of the whole picture.

How to be a Good Poker Player Through Soft Skills

To perform at your best, you need to have a lot of energy and concentration. Be sure to:

• Get enough sleep.
• Exercise regularly.
• Eat a healthy and well-balanced diet.
• Prepare for your poker sessions.
• Remove distractions when playing.
• Observe all available information.
• Know when it��s time to quit playing.
• Stop chasing loses.

On top of that, never rush to make a decision.

Take your time and evaluate all available information, put your opponent on the range, and think through all the hand before making your final decision.

Remember that every time you make a sub-optimal play for any reason, you are simply leaving money at the table. And to be honest, I was struggling with this part long after I started playing poker.

The thing that helped me the most was realizing that I need to build structure into my life and grow habits that would help me along the way.

If you have to fight with yourself every time you need to study or play, your efforts will not last very long. So, do yourself a favor and think about how you can introduce some systems that will prevent you from playing when you shouldn��t, and help you perform at your best when you play.

Playing poker professionally is a long-term journey.

If you are better than your opponents, you will win in the end. Mastering the soft side of the game will help you do exactly that �C become a better player than most of your opponents.

Image credit: Natallia Boroda/Shutterstock

How to Become a Professional Poker Player Step 6: Manage Your Money Carefully

It��s quite a self-explanatory topic, and everyone knows how vital it is to manage finances well. Yet MANY pro poker player fall short because of a lack of discipline in this area.

There are a few things I highly recommend for anyone looking play poker professionally:

• Separate your poker bankroll from everyday cash.
• Have enough buy-ins to outlive variance (based on the game that you play).
• Do not withdraw money too often.
• Have savings to cover living expenses for at least six months.
• Be ready to move down the stakes if needed.

I know many good pro poker players who busted all their money just because they weren��t able to follow these simple tips – do not become one of them.

Also, never think that you can outsmart the variance or that it will not hit you. Based on your win rate, the variance can be huge, probably bigger than you ever imagined.

This graph is based on calculations of possible variance over 100,000 cash game hands where you have 2.5bb/100 win rate. Each of these lines represents a possible outcome, with different probabilities of happening.

You can see that after 100,000 hands you can be down a couple of hundred or thousands of big blinds, even if you should be winning. At the worst-case scenario, you can be down as many as 80 buy-ins.

The same can be said about tournaments, SNGs and other formats. If you��re a winning player, it doesn��t mean that you��re guaranteed to win over a short period, so it��s better to be ready than sorry.

This is why it is vital to have funds to cover your living expenses and big bankroll to outlive the swings. Do not cut corners in this area.

Pros and Cons of Being a Professional Poker Player

We already covered how to become a professional poker player and avoid many mistakes on the road, but before making your final decision, you should understand what life in this line of work is really like.

Depending on your experience, you may think that winning in poker isn��t that hard. But to reach a high level of success, you need to devote a lot of time to playing and studying the game. As the saying goes:

��Poker is a hard way to make an easy living.��

I couldn��t agree with it more. From a distance, the life of a poker player may look like a dream, but no one sees how much effort goes into reaching that level.

Playing poker professionally is completely different from playing poker for fun, and you need to understand those differences.

The game is not about huge scores that you see on TV or in the movies, but much more about showing up every day and putting the grind on the tables.

Let me list what I consider to be the pros and cons of being a professional poker player:

PROS

• Freedom – You can do what you love for a living, without anyone bossing you around. On top of that, you can be flexible with your schedule and build it around your life to fully enjoy it.
• Competition – The game is very challenging and hugely exciting. You��ll be able to compete with other professional poker players and constantly improve, which is a good recipe for an interesting career.
• Traveling – If you reach higher levels, you will have the opportunity to travel the world and enjoy all of the experiences without spending any of your money. How cool is that?
• Money – Last but not least! Poker can give you the resources to live a wonderful life and offer almost unlimited earning potential. Moreover, you get to keep all the rewards to yourself, which is very unlikely to happen in other areas.

CONS

• Mentally draining – Even though this game is really fun, it can quickly become emotionally taxing if you are not fully prepared in all parts of your game. Variance can be brutal, and it will likely hit you very hard at some point in your career.
• Exhausting – It��s not as easy to consistently put long hours into playing and studying as it it may seem. Most likely, you will need to put in much more work than you think to succeed. On top of that, when you find yourself a longer downswing with breakeven stretch or even loosing for a couple of months, it can become very tiring. You need a lot of discipline to stay at the tables.
• Social stigma – Poker can be seen as pure gambling by anyone outside the game, which is why it may not be accepted well by your friends and family. I had this problem at the beginning of my career, and it took years for my family to realize that it was a serious job – just like anything else.

So before making any decisions, be sure to weigh up all the pros and cons and see if it suits who you are, or who you want to become.

How do I Become a Professional Poker Player �C Is It For You?

Now you can decide for yourself if this is something you want to do for a living. Poker is not for everyone, and there is no shame to admit it. But if you choose to go down this path and commit yourself to the game, it can be very rewarding.

Obviously, you need to be very honest with yourself and understand why you want to pursue it. Do you want to play just because you are tired of what you��re doing, or because you have a genuine passion for the game and want to become the best?

These are two completely different answers. If your only goal is to make money, you will have a very hard time finding motivation when things don��t go your way.

I believe that it is close to impossible to reach long-term success in poker if you do not have the passion and commitment for the game. Either take it very seriously or look for other options.

But as long as you have the passion, are willing to put hard work and understand realistic expectations for the game, you will be fine!

If you love poker �C just go for it, and you will learn everything else along the way.

If you’re new to poker and don’t know where to play, we suggest checking out Casino.org’s list of recommended online poker sites. We have tons of reviews you can read to find the one that’s most suitable for you.

If you want to be good at reading your opponents when playing poker, you need to make use of all the information available. Everything from bet sizing, behavior, and even the time they take to make a decision, can be important in figuring out your opponent��s holdings.

Let��s take a look at the most effective ways to read your opponents in all types of poker, from live dealer poker to video poker.

The Most Important Part: Putting Your Opponents On A Range

No matter if you��re playing live or online poker, the most important part of reading your opponents is putting them on a range.

The ��range�� is the various possible hands they could hold, so putting them on a range means trying to figure out what those hands could be. As the hand plays out and your opponent makes more decisions and takes more actions, you can use this information to narrow down their range.

It��s a vital skill to master.

But instead of thinking about ranges, many players try to guess the exact hand of their opponents on the river. This approach doesn��t work.

Good players don��t make blind guesses; they use a methodical approach. Even though it requires a lot of practice, you can learn to put your opponent on a range by following these four simple steps.

Step 1:  Analyze preflop actions

If you want to put your opponent on an accurate range of cards by the river, you should start your work preflop.

The first thing you need to consider is your opponent��s position.

They will be playing completely different hands from under the gun (UTG) and button (BTN), so it��s vital to assign them a realistic range.A player who is raising from the first position will not have 63s in their range, so is very unlikely to have strong holdings on the flop with 633.

However, a player on the BTN can easily have such hands, and way more other 3x holdings, so you need to play differently against these ranges.

Knowing the position is not enough. You also have to identify your opponent��s type.

If they��re passive, they could be playing just 15% of hands from the cutoff (CO), while an aggressive opponent could be opening 35% or even more. The same thought process should be applied for other situations when someone limps, or you face a 3-bet.

When you evaluate your opponent’s position and playing style, you can already make an educated guess of what hands they could be playing.

Step 2: Narrow down the range based on flop action

The next step is quite straightforward. Using information from the flop action, you can narrow down their range.

You can learn what your opponent should do in any given situation by studying game theory optimal (GTO) strategy and then adjust these ranges based on your observations.

This will help you understand what hands your opponent should be checking or betting and then reduce their likely holdings accordingly.

Step 3: Evaluate additional information

To narrow down the range even further, you should look at all the other information available to you. Things like your opponent��s poker stats, bet sizing, or even physical tells can say a lot about their holdings. The table dynamics will give you a ton of additional insights.

This is a huge part of learning how to play poker, so we��ll come back to it later on in the article.

Step 4: Keep reducing their possible holdings on the turn and river

Just like you did in the second step for the flop play, you can continue reducing your opponent��s possible holdings based on their actions and community cards on the turn and river.

It��s worth saying that lots of people have a similar playing style and share similarities that are easy to notice and exploit.

An example would be that they don��t adjust to the situation. If you notice someone checking top pair with a weak kicker on the flop, they��re very likely to take the same action with similar holdings in other hands as well.

So after seeing it once, you��ll be able to remove these holdings from their range in similar spots.

You can quickly get a feel of player tendencies and use this information until you notice that your particular opponent adjusts their play, and then react accordingly.

Learning to put your opponent on a range instead of guessing a specific hand is the best way to read other players.

However, you can make even better decisions if you take into consideration all the additional information available to you.

How To Read Opponents in Online Poker Games

Given that you don��t physically see your opponent when playing online, there are only a few things you can consider.

You should closely monitor bet sizing and how long your opponent takes to make decisions.

Let��s start with the first one.

1. Look at bet sizing

Although probably the best indication of your opponent’s strength, this information is massively underused in games.

Players are very unlikely to change bet sizing and their betting patterns, so if you notice how they play their strong and weak hands, and what sizing they use in different spots, it could be a serious tell.

Even though this is very player dependent, here are two common situations:

• Using tiny bet sizing
  Players are unlikely to bet small as a bluff. Of course, they can do that with medium-strength hands, but you will rarely see complete air when facing such a bet. For the most part, they are simply trying to see a cheap showdown.
• Over betting
  This is very player dependent but more often than not people try to choose over bets with strong holdings. This shouldn��t be applied against regulars who balance their ranges.

However, if you see someone using truly big sizing, especially on dry board, they are more likely to be value betting.

Most players understand that your range is polarized in these situations, where you either have a strong hand that is going to call no matter what or a weak one, which will be folding even to a smaller bet – so it makes no point to over bet as a bluff.

These are just guidelines but could be a good starting point when observing your opponents.

2. Observe how much time they spend making decisions

Many players leave a lot of valuable information on the table by not considering the timing of others.

Some actions can be a very good indication of your opponent��s hand strength:

• Instant check
  Almost always an indication of a weak hand. It shows that your opponent didn��t have to spend any time to think through the decision, which is very unlikely to happen with a strong holding.
• Instant bet
  Can indicate strength, except for a c-bet. When a player instantly decides to continuation bet, they��re less likely to have a strong holding, but in most other cases you should be aware of this information.
• Instant call
  Most of the time it indicates that your opponent has a medium-strength hand or a draw, and they want to see another card without even thinking about raising or folding.
• Checking after taking a lot of time
  Very unlikely to have a strong holding. From my experience, a bet in this situation will take down the most, the majority of the time.
• Betting or raising after taking a lot of time
  This is very strong. I rarely see players bluffing with this line, and the reason they take more time is to appear weak, so you shouldn��t be fooled by this action.
• Calling after taking a long time
  Generally indicates more strength. We can follow the same logic as in the previous point that players tend to take more time to look weaker and encourage another bet from you.

It goes without saying that this could change depending on the players, so you shouldn��t base your decision on this information alone but instead consider it along with other information.

Moreover, some players may try to fake these tells and act the opposite, so observe your opponent and be open to adjusting your strategy.

How To Read Opponents In Live Poker Games

While there are only a few ways to read your opponents when playing online, you can get a lot of additional information in live games.

That being said, there��s not much difference between online and live games regarding sizing and timing tells, so the same logic applies as covered in the online section.

However, there are a lot of other factors to consider that I��ll split into two different parts �C physical and verbal tells.

Physical Tells

1. Physical tells that indicate strength

• Player hesitates and then bets or raises
  A very reliable tell that indicates a lot of strength on your opponent��s part. They wouldn��t want to appear weak when bluffing and wouldn��t send such signals.
• Double-checking hole cards before betting postflop
  In my experience, a player is very unlikely to be bluffing with this line of action. Also, players rarely have suited hands when double-checking, so that��s worth noticing.
• Playing with chips in an unusual way
  Indicates that your opponent is relaxed and less likely to be bluffing. Of course, if they always play with chips in a specific way, ignore this, but if they usually sit quietly and out of nowhere start doing some tricks after betting, they��re probably not bluffing.

2. Physical tells that indicate weakness

• The pretending-to-plan-to-bet-when-waiting act
  Whenever you see players reaching for chips when you��re thinking of betting, you can be sure that they do not have a strong hand. It doesn��t necessarily mean that they��re going to fold to your bet but they��re very unlikely to have better than a one pair hand, so you can continue betting and barrel them off in most cases.
• Counting chips for betting and then checking
  Strong indication of a weak or medium-strength hand. By this action, your opponent tries to appear strong and discourage you from betting while most likely just hoping for a cheap showdown.
• Unnecessary movement
  This attracts attention and indicates a weak hand. If you notice someone putting chips in the pot by slamming it hard, hear loud announcements of call or bet, see extra arms or shoulders movements, you could be facing a weak hand and an opponent who is just trying to look scary. This also includes shuffling cards or doing anything else that draws the attention you actually wouldn��t want when having a strong hand.

As a general rule of thumb, players are weak when they try to show strength and are strong when showing weakness.

Verbal Tells

1. Verbal tells that indicate strength

• Talking while in hand
  Indicates that the player is relaxed and less likely to bluff. Of course, when someone asks how many chips you have and the player answers, it doesn��t count. But if the player starts talking while you��re thinking without any particular reason, they��re probably trying to convince you that they��re just friendly and you should play with them.
• Announcing they don��t have a strong hand
  If you think about it, why would anyone ever say something like this when bluffing? In reality, this is quite a reliable tell that indicates your opponent��s range is very strong. The same goes for naming the exact hand. If a player says that they don��t have JT on 987 5 2, you can almost be guaranteed that they have at least a 6x or even T6 and are trying to make their range look weaker, so you��ll call.
  Pretty much any announcement of a weak hand ever actually means they have a weak hand or even a draw.
• Asking for action
  Whenever you hear a player saying something like ��you are committed,�� ��if you have it, you have it,�� ��let’s go,�� or anything that encourages you to play, they��re likely holding something good.

2. Verbal tells that indicate weakness

• Joking when waiting for action
  Smiling and laughing is an indication of a weak hand from a player who is waiting to act (not necessarily true for player who is betting themself), but it��s even more likely to be true when a player is joking. Again, the reasoning is very similar. They would not risk attracting attention and discouraging action with a premium holding, so they��re more likely to be weak when joking or making funny statements.
• Verbally announcing checking
  Indicates a weak hand because they want to appear confident to prevent you from betting. The louder the check is, the more likely the player has a weak holding. The same could be said about verbal announcements of ��calling��. When they have poor holding, they��ll do everything to indicate strength, which is very unlikely action with a really strong hand, because they would not want to discourage the action.

Everything can be logically explained, so always try to remember this and make better decisions.

Important Takeaways

• Generally, acting strong = weak hand, acting weak = strong hand.
• Tells are more useful when playing against recreational players.
• Some players try to give false tells, so be aware of this possibility.
• Use everything as an additional source of information, don��t blindly follow one thing.
• Bet sizing and timing tells can be used both live and online.
• Putting an opponent on a range is by far the most reliable way to predict their possible holdings.

Regardless of your general strategy and how tight you like to play, you simply have to poker bluff every now and then. Your opponents need to know that you��re capable of it �C otherwise, you��ll become too predictable and too easy to play against.

Bluffing in Poker: What You Need to Know

• Some players hate bluffing and just don��t want to take the risk. They believe that ��tight is right,�� and you should only play your strong hands.
• This approach may be good in some very specific cases and certain super-soft games, but it won��t cut it in any serious lineup.
• Luckily, like everything else in poker, the fine art of bluffing is something you can learn.

While you shouldn��t expect to become the best bluffer in poker overnight, reading through these tips and applying them in your games will certainly help you get better at it.

1. Detach Yourself From The Money During a Poker Bluff

When you sit down to play bluff poker, you shouldn��t be thinking in terms of real-world money. The chips you have in front of you are just big blinds, and you should see them as such.

It takes time to develop this mindset, but it will help you immensely to become better at bluffing.

When you��re thinking about pulling a poker bluff, you need to clear your mind of any such notions.

For example, in a $2/$5 game, betting $200 may seem like a lot of money. But, if you think in terms of it big blinds and you��re betting 40 BB to win 150 BB pot, it��s much easier.

I understand that this is easier said than done and it takes a lot of practice, but it��s really important.

You��ll never be able to pull a good poker bluff if you associate every bet with something you could buy with that money instead. It��ll make you hesitant to pull the trigger, and even if you do end up doing it, your opponents might pick up on the fact you��re doing it reluctantly.

The only time you should think about actual money is when you know this could be a factor for your opponent.

If you know that they think in terms of cash and are in the state of mind described above, this is something you can use to your advantage. These players are often prime targets for a large poker bluff as they just won��t call you and risk a lot of money with a non-nut hand.

2. Learn How To Tell A Story as a Poker Bluffer

If you really want to become an expert poker bluffer, you need to understand that your bluffs must make sense.

Being brave and not caring about money is all well and good, but any decent player will call you out when your story doesn��t add up.

So, before you decide to go for bluff poker think about what you��re trying to represent. Weaker players don��t seem to have a good grasp of this concept.

For example, you open from UTG, they flat call in the big blind, and the flop comes A A K. They check, you bet, and then they raise you.

This story just doesn��t make sense.

You have a huge range advantage on this board, and they only have a few solid hands in their range that connect with that board and don��t 3-bet before the flop. As a bluffing spot, this is one of the worst you could pick, and a good player will often call you on the flop even with air, just to take it away on the turn.

Make sure you know what kind of story you��re trying to tell first and foremost, think about whether it makes sense, and then proceed to the execution phase.

For example, you could check on a turn that completes a possible flush draw with the intention of raising your opponent��s bet. That story is much more believable and will put your opponent in a tough spot, especially when you follow through with a bet on the river if they do call the turn.

Sometimes you��ll tell a perfect story and still get picked off. This doesn��t mean that you��re bad at bluffing. Some players just hate folding.

While your poker bluff won��t work all the time, if you pick your spots carefully, you can add a lot of chips in your stack by pulling the trigger.

3. Control Your Body Language

This one is exclusively dedicated to live poker, but I just can��t leave this point aside.

Controlling your body language is easier said than done but definitely something you need to work on if you want to become an expert bluffer in poker.

Physical tells play an important role in live poker, and if you have too many of these, experienced players are very likely to get a read on you.

But what if your hands are shaking or you start to breathe harder when you��re bluffing? What can you do about it? It��s not like you can really control these things.

First of all, you should be aware of your table presence and figure out if there are any changes that happen when you��re bluffing. When you get this part right, you can start working towards eliminating them or minimizing their effects.

One good way to go about it is to have a fixed posture when you��re involved in an important hand.

For example, keeping both hands together and close to your mouth will help hide many recognizable tells. It��ll be hard to see if your hands are shaking, and other players won��t have a clear view of your throat or your chest.

Of course, you have to do this when you��re not bluffing as well. Simply find a certain posture that you��re comfortable with and stick with it every time you get involved in a significant pot.

While this won��t get rid of all tells, it will certainly make it much more difficult for your opponents to pick off any solid reads.

4. Be Aware Of Your Table Image During Your Poker Bluff

Knowing how other players perceive you is quite important in general, but it��s essential for constructing your bluffing strategy.

I know players who poker bluff so rarely that they can pretty much get me off any hand that��s not the nuts. Then there are some players I��ll happily look up all the way till the river with a second pair and no kicker.

Image is everything.

If you want to be good at bluffing, you need to develop an image of someone who��s more than capable of bluffing but isn��t crazy loose. That way, you��ll always keep your opponents on the edge of their seats and guessing.

However, you can��t always plan for how a session will go down.

Maybe you��ll get several great bluffing opportunities in a row, and this might make some people think you poker bluff all the time. Or, you may have been card dead, so you appear as a rock who never gets involved with anything but nuts.

Try to see things from your opponents�� perspective and adjust your play accordingly.

If it feels like they might have you pegged as a crazy LAG, it might be a good time to step back a bit and pass on some bluffing opportunities.

You have to consider the fact that you��re much more likely to get looked up in this scenario, so the profitability of your poker bluff will have decreased significantly.

5. Learn To Pick The Best Spots

When you��re thinking about bluffing, you need to have something going your way. Either the situation is favorable, or the player you��re facing is likely to fold to a bluff (ideally both, of course).

Learning how to pick your bluffing spots is one of the essential skills you��ll need to develop.

Unfortunately, there isn��t a simple guide to this.

Online poker is such a fluid game that you can��t just have one strategy and stick to it no matter what. In some games, you��ll have heaps of great bluffing spots. Sometimes, you��ll be pretty much forced to play it straight and bluff very rarely.

Some general tips on this topic include:

• Don��t bluff calling stations �C they don��t fold enough.
• Avoid bluffing players who are tilting.
• Always be on the lookout for scare cards: over-cards, cards completing obvious draws, etc.
• Bluff more against shorter stacks �C they don��t have enough chips to speculate.
• At the same time, avoid super-short stacks. They might be too committed.

As you can see, there��s a variety of factors you need to think about when picking your bluffing spots.

For example, scare cards are one of the best friends of every good poker bluffer, and they give you a lot of opportunities to continue your aggression and force your opponent to fold.

Of course, you will rarely be in a perfect scenario where you can tick all of these boxes, but making educated bluffs and considering these elements will help you a lot.

6. Avoid Bluffing In Multi-Way Pots

Some of the biggest and craziest poker bluffs that ever happened �C happened in heads up pots. You��ll almost never see a seasoned player pulling a massive bluff against two, three, or more players.

And for good reason.

With multiple players involved in a hand, pulling off a successful poker bluff becomes increasingly difficult. There is just so much you need to figure out before you proceed, and the likelihood of someone having a good hand increases as well.

Of course, you can still take small stabs at a pot when no one has shown an interest – but don��t get too involved.

If you try and get called by two or more players, it��s time to throw in the towel.

There are so many better spots you can take advantage of that there is no need to waste your chips in unfavorable situations.

7. Toy With Different Bet Sizes When Bluffing

One of the things experts are really good at is toying with different sizes to throw their opponents off and confuse them.

For example, if someone��s expecting a normal bet of about half the pot but is instead faced with an oversized wager of 1.2x the pot, they��ll find themselves in unknown territory.

They��ve probably made plans for a normal bet, but now they have to rethink their strategy completely.

You also need to understand that your bluff poker moves can��t look too weak or constructed in a way as to price in your opponents. Players who are bad at bluffing will frequently bet something like 15 percent of the pot on the river and then will complain about getting called with a weak hand.

You can get away with mixing in some small bets now and then, but do understand that these are simply much likelier to get called.

If you want to bluff, you can��t be afraid to commit chips. If you��d bet about half pot for value, you have to bet the same when you��re bluffing. Otherwise, you��re just making it too easy for any observant opponent.

That isn��t to say that you shouldn��t experiment a little.

In different lineups, different things could work quite well. So, it��s fine to test various bet sizes to see what happens as long as you are up against recreational players, who likely don��t know how to react to such changes.

Let Your Journey To Becoming An Expert Bluffer in Poker Begin

If you��re new to poker and have aspirations of becoming a pro at bluffing �C you should be very careful.

Big bluffs may look awesome on TV, but when it��s your money going across the table, it is an entirely different story.

I��d say that you should instead aspire to become an all-around good poker player, and bluffing should just be one part of your overall strategy.

The thing is, you don��t want to be known as the bluffer in your game. The only thing that title will bring you is that people will be looking you up lightly, forcing you to bleed your chips if you are actually bluffing too much.

The best bluffers are the ones you don��t think of as bluffers. These players are super hard to play against because you never know where you��re at with them.

So, if you want to become an expert bluffer, this is what you should aspire to.

Everyone can throw their stack away time and time again in a desperate attempt to win a pot. The best know exactly when to put their chips at risk and when to give up �C and that��s what makes them the best.

Brush up on your knowledge even more with some light reading:

The same applies to your opponents. While you��ll occasionally come across straightforward players who only bet when they have the goods, a vast majority are capable of pulling a bluff at least now and then.

It��s your job to sniff out these bluffs and catch them with their hand in the cookie jar �C but you��ll need to learn how to spot them first.

So if you��re facing a bet and aren��t sure what to make of it, these tips on common poker bluffs should give you a good starting point.

1. A Flop Continuation Bet Poker Bluff

If you��ve been playing online poker for any length of time, you��re probably aware of the continuation bet as its one of the most common poker bluffs.

This is a play when the player chooses to bet on the flop after raising preflop, and many of your opponents will do that whether they connect with the board or not.

While c-bets work very well and are a powerful weapon in your bluffing toolbelt, you can��t just bet every flop without thinking about it. This may work against very weak players who play fit-or-fold poker, but it won��t work against thinking opponents.

They��ll consider your preflop range and how that range corresponds with the flop texture. When trying to pick off a c-bet bluff, you should be doing the same.

Some players will use this move too frequently and you can easily exploit that.

For example, if someone has raised before the flop from an early position and the board comes with low to middle connected cards, their flop bet is more likely to be a bluff. The board texture is much more likely to help other players, especially if blinds are still in play.

Always be on the lookout for the players who continuation bet too often. This is definitely one of the more common poker bluffs out there, and many players don��t know how to balance it properly.

Once you figure out someone is automatically betting almost every flop, you can counter them by calling their bets in position or mixing in an occasional check-raise to force them to give up on whatever equity they might have after throwing some more money into the pot.

2. The Button Raise Poker Bluff

Even bad players know that you��re supposed to raise with all sorts of hands from the button to try and steal the blinds, which is why this is one of the most common poker bluffs out there.

Of course, it��s hard to talk about complete bluffs when discussing a preflop situation, but if you��re raising with a hand that you shouldn��t, you��re essentially bluffing.

So if you notice a player who is opening any two cards, you can add way more hands in your 3-betting range and call medium strength holdings from the big blind.

If your opponent is playing way too wide in this spot, they will have a very hard time defending against your 3-bets.

On top of that, if you structure your calling range properly and have a lot of decent hands against their wide and weak range, you��ll have many opportunities to take down the pots.

So while the player on the button has a huge advantage of position, if you notice them playing way too aggressive, you can easily punish them for it.

3. Bluffing To See Where They��re At

Although you won��t find this type of bluff with competent pros, recreational players seem very fond of this move, making it one of the more common poker bluffs.

This type of bluff is usually marked by a fairly small sizing.

As a poker bluff, it��s not a very good one as it doesn��t price other players out, and it reopens the action for anyone who might have a strong hand and has decided to play it tricky.

This play usually isn��t too hard to sniff out as the player making it is often quite honest about it.

The whole bluff is designed to buy the pot in the event everybody else has whiffed completely and are happy to give up, or at least to see the next card with a hope to improve very cheaply.

So while you will not see this move from experienced players, you��ll often face such bets even in multiway pots from someone new to the game, so you should not be afraid to play back.

4. The Instant-Bet Poker Bluff

When you check to your opponent and they instantly fire a fairly sizable bet, you might be facing an instant-bet bluff.

This is a common poker bluff, especially among live or video poker players, and the idea behind it is to confuse the opponent and not give them time to think.

Of course, you can have as much time as you want because the speed with which they bet doesn��t dictate your action �C but this play does work sometimes.

The instant-bet bluff can be quite effective against inexperienced players who��ll feel pressured into making a quick decision. They might respond by auto-folding their cards without taking the proper time to think about the hand.

So when you face such a bet from your opponent, always try to break down the entire hand to see if they can represent a very strong hand.

More often then not, they are just trying to look intimidating, so you can pick a couple of extra pots based on that.

5. A Donk-Bet Poker Bluff

Most of the time in poker or live dealer poker, you��ll want to check the action to the original raiser and let them continue with the aggression.

There is very little advantage to betting into them on the flop to let them know you have a good hand and allow them to get away cheaply. Hence the play was dubbed a donk-bet.

While good players do use the donk-bet as a part of their overall strategy, you won��t see it very often since it is much harder to balance and put into overall solid strategy.

Bad or inexperienced players, on the other hand, will frequently donk-bet. And more often than not this will be done as a bluff.

The logic behind the move is to try and win the pot right away instead of having to deal with a continuation bet and everything that comes after.

You��ll find that some players simply refuse to give up on their donk-bet bluffs even after being repeatedly put in tough spots because of it.

With the original raiser having a position and range advantage, for the most part, they can choose to play however they want �C call or raise with hands that have good equity and let the bluffer throw away some more money on the turn if they��d like.

So when you notice a recreational player donk betting on the flop, don��t rush into folding.

6. The Turn Stab Poker Bluff

As discussed earlier, firing a continuation bet on the flop is quite common.

So, when the player who��s supposed to bet on the flop decides to check behind, it opens doors for another common poker bluff, the turn stab.

This is another one of those bluffs that will work fairly frequently, especially against weaker players.

Good players know how to balance their check-back ranges by checking some of their strong hands. However, recreational players usually have absolute air or the nuts in these spots.

Since it��s really hard to flop the nuts, the turn stab bluff works quite well.

Even if the in-position player calls the turn, it��s possible to take them off of their hand with a river bet depending on how the board runs out.

So, if you don��t have this one in your arsenal, you should definitely start looking for good spots to add this play and always be ready to bluff-catch against other players.

7. The Min-Bet Poker Bluff

Again, this is one of those bluffs you��ll probably encounter frequently but only from less experienced players.

It usually happens on the river where they��ll try to buy the pot with a tiny bet.

Although this is a funny-looking bluff, it can be quite tricky, especially when you don��t have a hand with any real showdown value.

The problem with this bluff is that you have to be quite certain that it is, in fact, a bluff.

In that case, you can raise and win the pot. However, if it turns out to be a small value bet, you��ll be in the world of hurt when they jam on you.

The reason why pros don��t resort to this bluff as much is that a good player will simply make a call with a wide array of hands as they know they��re getting the right price.

So if you find yourself in this situation and see that your opponent��s story doesn��t add up, you should be calling fairly wide and can even consider raising if you are holding complete air.

8. The Squeeze Poker Bluff

If there is one thing that��s really changed about poker over the years, it��s the fact games have become much more aggressive.

Long gone are days where most people were sitting around the table, waiting for the nuts. These days, players are looking for good opportunities and are less worried about the quality of their holdings.

The squeeze bluff has become one of the most common poker bluffs, to the point where even inexperienced players resort to it quite often.

When there��s a raise and a few callers ahead of you, there is plenty of dead money in the pot and only one player (the original raiser) to really worry about.

So, why not raise and try to squeeze everyone out to win those sweet poker chips in the middle?

Again, this is a preflop play, so it may be hard to categorize it as a pure bluff, but when done with a weak hand, you aren��t expecting to have the best cards if you get any action.

The purpose of this bluff is to put everyone else to the test and force them to fold hands that are likely ahead and maybe even have you dominated.

For the most part, this move works great since people tend to be over-folding in these situations, so you can surely take advantage of that.

Don��t be scared when someone else is squeezing and don��t give up too easily. Unless you��re at the table full of really inexperienced players, you��ll see this play quite frequently.

9. The Triple-Barrel Poker Bluff

Although not as common as other bluffs on this list, the triple-barrel bluff is usually very effective and quite difficult to deal with.

When a player is determined to win a pot and they fire on the flop, the turn, and the river, calling them down without a very strong hand is a tough task.

It��s a good thing that most players don��t have it in them to go for a triple-barrel bluff frequently as that would make the game much harder overall. The only way to deconstruct these bluffs is by approaching the hand in a very methodical and calm manner.

Start by thinking about their likely preflop range and go from there. By betting all three streets, they��re representing a very strong hand. How likely are they to have a strong hand given the preflop action and the board structure?

Of course, any physical tells that you might have picked up along the way, and any previous knowledge of the player��s tendencies can come in very handy as well.

You better be quite sure someone is even capable of making this bluff before you decide to call them down.

10. The Overbet Poker Bluff

It��s only logical to conclude this list of top poker bluffs by the one that��s probably the hardest to deal with.

The overbet bluff is mostly applied on the river when your opponent decides to blast away with a really large bet �C usually well over the size of the pot.

This type of bluff is not as uncommon as you might think. Loose players, even some very good ones, love to use it to put the maximum pressure on their opponents.

Of course, they��ll balance it out by polarizing their ranges and also sometimes betting huge when they have the virtual nuts.

What makes this bluff so hard to deal with is the fact you��re getting really bad odds on the call. So, you have to be sure you��re being bluffed to make the call, and it��s not easy to be sure when you have a mediocre hand and are facing a huge bet.

As a general rule of thumb, you shouldn��t be calling too many of these bets. Keep your hero calls for those times you��re up against a total maniac or a really good player that you believe is capable of making such play with air.

Keep in mind that this kind of bet will pretty much never be a medium hand. They��ll either have the nuts or nothing, so your hand strength is not as important as you might think.

Common Poker Bluffs And How to Use Them

If you play poker, you��ll have to deal with bluffs on a daily basis, and I hope that this article will help you recognize and deal with the most common spots.

There is so much to say about bluffing in poker that it��s impossible to explain in one article, but you have to start somewhere.

At the same time, keep in mind that your opponents might be privy to this knowledge as well. If you��re getting ready to fire away with air, think about these common situations.

If your play is screaming ��bluff�� then maybe you��d be better off cutting your losses and saving your chips for another, more favorable spot.

Poker hand rankings chart

Let’s explain what each hand ranking means in more detail:

1. Royal flush: the highest possible straight flush containing T J Q K and A of the same suit. This is the strongest possible hand in Texas Hold��em that is guaranteed to win every time.
2. Straight flush: five cards of the same suit in a sequence, such as 3s 4s 5s 6s 7s.
3. Four of a kind or quads: Four cards of the same rank plus any other card, e.g. Q Q Q Q 2.
4. Full house: three of a kind plus a pair, e.g. 9 9 9 5 5.
5. Flush: Five cards of the same suit. There are four suits: clubs, diamonds, hearts, and spades. If all your five cards are in just one of these suits, you have a flush.
6. Straight: Five cards in sequential order, provided they’re not all of the same suit, e.g. 5, 6, 7, 8, 9. Keep in mind that an ace can help form two straights in Hold’em, namely A 2 3 4 5 and T J Q K A.
7. Three of a kind (trips): Three cards of the same rank coupled with any two non-paired cards, e.g. T T T 7 2.
8. Two pair: Two cards of the same rank and two more different cards of the same rank, e.g. 9 9 5 5 J.
9. One pair: Two cards of the same rank combined with three cards of different values. For example, K K 9 5 2 is a pair of kings.
10. A high card: A hand containing five cards of different ranks and suits that don’t make any of the other combinations. For example, a hand like K, J, 7, 5, 2 is referred to as a king-high.

Suits have no ranking in poker, which means no suit is higher than another.

Poker hand values are exactly the same in 5 Card Draw and 7 Card Stud poker variations.

But How Do You Make Poker hands In Texas Hold��em?

In Hold��em, all players are dealt two face-down cards to start the hand. After that, five more community cards are dealt across the board for everyone to use.

All players can use all seven available cards to make the best possible five-card hand combination. This means that you can:

• Use two cards from your hand and three community cards
• Combine just one of your hole cards with four cards on the board
• Use only the five community cards

Once it’s time for the showdown, the cards speak. When you turn over your hand, you’ll always play the best five-card hand possible.

There are usually no problems here as the dealer will compare all poker hands and announce the winner.

Comparing Hands In Hold��em To Determine The Winner

But what happens if two or more players have a poker hand from the same category? Who wins when everyone has two pairs or a straight?

The best piece of advice to make this distinction is to remember that, in Hold��em, you always start at the top. For example, it’s clear cut in a pair vs. pair scenario. A pair of aces beats a pair of kings. A pair of tens beats a pair of eights, etc.

In two pair situations, the top pair is the only relevant factor in determining the winner. If one player has K K 2 2 X and the other one has Q Q J J X, the one with the pair of kings wins.

This is sometimes confusing for beginners because the other hand looks stronger, and it would be the case if card values were somehow added. But that’s not the case in Hold’em.

The same rule applies to full houses, where the player with the best three-of-a-kind combination will always win the pot. In straight and flush scenarios, the winner is determined by comparing the highest card in the combination.

For example:

• 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 beats 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

• Ah 9h 7h 5h 2h beats Kh Qh 9h 7h 5h

Finally, in the event that both players only have a high-card hand (no pair), the one with the highest card wins.

Of course, this only applies if there are no better combinations available on the board.

Resolving A Tie: The Role Of Kicker In Poker

Every now and again, it will happen that two players have the exact same poker hand. For example, they could both have two pairs, kings and tens. With players new to poker, this will often create a lot of confusion.

That said, the rules of Hold’em are very clear on how these situations are resolved. Kickers are compared, and whoever has the higher kicker wins.

For those unfamiliar with the poker lingo, kickers are those dangling cards in your hand that aren��t a part of any combinations. For example:

• In a hand K K 7 7 J, the jack is the kicker card
• If you have A A A 9 5, both 9 and 5 are ��kickers��

So, in our kings and tens scenario, players would compare their fifth card. If one player had K K T T 7 and the other held K K T T Q, the pot goes to the player holding the queen.

Keep in mind that this rule only applies if a player’s hole card is higher than the available community cards. Remember, you always get to play the five best cards on the showdown.

Here’s a couple of scenarios with the same starting hands but different boards to clarify this further.

Example 1

Player A has 9 8, and player B has 9 7. By the river, the board read 9 9 5 2 4. In this case, Player A wins because their kicker plays.

The best possible hand for Player A is 9 9 9 8 5, while the best hand for Player B is 9 9 9 7 5. The eight beats the seven, so Player A wins the pot.

Example 2

Both players have the same starting poker hands as before 9 8 vs. 9 7, but this time the community board read 9 9 A J 2. In this scenario, the hand is a tie, and players will split the pot.

This is because both players have the exact same best five-card hand: 9 9 9 A J. Since both the 8 and the 7 are lower than the ace and the jack, they��re disregarded.

It may still seem a bit confusing, but you��ll get the hang of it as you play more.

Just try to keep two important rules in mind when figuring out which poker hands beat which:

• The best possible five-card hand always plays
• Always check at the top and work your way down

Once you learn all the hand rankings and memorize these important rules, you��ll no longer have any problems figuring out who wins at the showdown.

Holding The Nuts �C When You Know You Can��t Lose

Unlike in some other poker variants, you��ll often find yourself in spots in Texas Hold��em where you know you have the best possible hand.

This is known as “the nuts” and it’s one of the best feelings you can have at the table.

This is possible because the game combines your hidden ��hole�� cards and community cards. Hence, there is plenty of information to work with.

For example, if you have Ah 5h and the board reads 9h 7h 2c 6c Qh, you have an ace-high flush and the best possible hand. There is no way for any other player to beat you.

Albeit simple, this is another concept that beginners are sometimes confused about and will play their hand cautiously, even in spots where they can��t lose.

If you’re new to poker, I’d suggest you take your time reading the board and thinking about hands when making your decisions.

After you gather some experience, you’ll become much better at this, and it’ll become almost second nature.

What To Do With This Information

Obviously, you need to know which hands beat which to play the game. But why is this information so crucial if you know the dealer will always ensure the pot goes to the rightful owner?

The thing is, everything you do at the Hold��em table revolves around this concept.

You��ll be making your decisions based on the strength of your hand and the perceived strength of your opponent��s holdings. If you know a full house beats a flush, you’ll be less inclined to chase your flush draws on a paired board.

When you have a top pair with a weak kicker, you’ll know your hand is susceptible, and you need to proceed with caution.

For someone who��s been playing poker for any serious length of time, this information may seem trivial and redundant, but it��s far from it.

The fact is, I still come across people who haven��t mastered the basics and aren��t quite sure what to do with their hands. Yet, they decide to jump into the action and play for real money. It doesn’t happen very often, but it’s not something you��d ever want – even in a friendly game where you’re playing for pennies.

At the lowest of stakes, it may only cause you some embarrassment but in any serious game, not being sure about which poker hands beat which can be a very costly mistake. It goes without saying that you can��t even begin to learn any more complex strategies before you master these basics.

Hand rankings are at the heart of all poker concepts, from the simplest ones to the ones used by those at the highest of stakes.

While I wouldn��t go as far as saying they’re completely different games, a live player trying their hand online (and vice versa) could be in for quite a surprise. The goal of this article is to emphasize some of the biggest differences between live and online poker games, which should make the transition easier.

Knowing the main differences can help you adjust much faster and boost your win-rate.

1. Live Poker Games Tend To Be Much Softer At Comparable Stakes

If you��ve played NL200 or higher stakes online, or heard the stories about it, you��re probably aware these games are tough.

Here you��ll find dedicated grinders who know the strategy and don��t make many mistakes. Beating online cash games at these stakes requires a lot of work of the tables.

Live games at the same or similar level, on the other hand, are a lot easier. A decent NL10 online grinder will be a favorite in most NL200 live games. That’s because most casinos don��t spread anything below NL200 (it��s not financially viable), so everyone who wants to play poker has to play these stakes or higher.

Online, you can play as low as NL5 if you simply want to have some fun, and many recreational players choose this option. Because of this, you won��t find many people just looking to blow off some steam in NL200 games online, while you can find plenty of such players in a live setting.

Of course, it works both ways.

A decent winner in their local 1/2 game sitting down at the same stakes online can be in for a rough ride. Therefore, when transitioning from one setting to another, be sure to choose an appropriate stake.

2. Live Poker Games Move At A Much Slower Pace

Online players are used to playing several tables at once and seeing hundreds of hands per hour.

With live games, you are limited to just one table, and the pace of that table will also be much slower than any online game you��ve ever played. You can expect to see only 30-40 hands an hour at most live games. There are several reasons for this.

First of all, it takes a live dealer some time to shuffle and deal cards, collect chips, distribute pots, etc. Secondly, a lot of live players like to take their time and aren��t necessarily just focused on playing, especially at lower stakes. Many of them are there to have fun, laugh, and talk.

If you come from an online background this can be quite annoying, but that is the reality of the game and you can��t do much about it. So it��s better to know this in advance and come prepared.

3. Reads Can Play An Important Role In Live Poker Games

One of the biggest differences between live and online poker is the presence of physical reads in the former.

While some people think poker tells are overrated, I tend to disagree. I��m not saying that live reads are the most important part of poker strategy, but they can be quite significant in large pots.

Many recreational players give away a lot of information about the strength of their hand, so if you put enough attention into it, you��ll be able to figure them out. Some slam chips when bluffing, while others only talk when holding a strong hand or do something else that gives away information.

Once you pick up on certain poker tells, you can get involved in more pots against these players and increase your edge even more.

4. You��ll Play More Multiway Pots In Live Poker Games

Whether it��s tournaments or cash games, be prepared for more multiway scenarios in live games. In online poker, people will often fold their bad hands and move on to the next table.

However, live players are forced to sit at a single table and choose to get involved with a lot of speculative hands, just because they don��t want to be bored and keep folding.

Cold-calling 3-bets is not uncommon in lower stakes games. While you��ll rarely see these moves online, people will routinely do it in a live game, followed by several other players joining the action.

Since there is no way around it, you��ll need to handle these multiway pots and make necessary changes to your strategy. So, you��ll need to be patient and wait for really good spots to get your money in ahead and make some disciplined laydowns.

5. You Can Take More Liberties With Bet Sizes In Live Poker Games

If you try opening for 5x in any decent online game, you can expect to get called only by the top of your opponent��s range. Contrary to this, live players don��t care as much about the sizing as they do about their hands.

What I mean is that if they like their hand, they will call your 3x, 5x, and sometimes even 10x open. So, you should experiment with your preflop raises to figure out how much your opponents are ready to pay and then take advantage of that information.

You can also vary your postflop bet sizes.

People often don��t pay attention to sizing, and you can get away with really small bets when you��re trying to control the pot or really big bets when you��re going for value. It’s nice that you don��t have to worry about balancing all that much in live games.

Unless you��re playing against a particularly tough lineup, no one will see what you��re doing. And, if you��re up against tough opponents, get up and find an easier game; it shouldn��t be hard.

6. You Can Easily Take Advantage Of Your Table Image In Live Poker Games

When you��re playing online, you are just one of many other players for your opponent.

As such, you��ll hardly get noticed unless you��re making some really big mistakes or giving a particular player a very hard time. However, its completely different in live games.

People spend several hours sitting with the same players, so naturally, they see what you��re doing and try to figure out your strategy – sometimes even subconsciously. Therefore, building your image for a single session (or even for the long run if you��re playing against the same players) can be beneficial.

For example, if live players tag you as a big bluffer, it��ll take a lot of convincing to change their minds. No matter how often you turn the nuts on the river, those few big bluffs you ran will stick in their minds for a long time.

There are no set rules as to what you should or shouldn��t do when building your image. The only important thing is to be aware of what people are likely to think about you and then take advantage of that perception by doing things they don��t expect.

7. You Can Have A Bigger Win Rate In Live Poker Games But Make More Money Per Hour Online

Although live games are much softer, it doesn��t mean that you will win more money by playing live instead of online. While your win-rate in terms of BB/100 will likely go up quite significantly, you��ll play much fewer hands as well.

If you win at 2BB/100 online and play 600 hands an hour playing multiple tables, you��ll need to win at least 12BB an hour in the live setting to win the same amount.

This is achievable, of course, and you can win even more, but it��s important to keep in mind that the best measure of your win rate is how much money you win per hour, not the actual big blind count.

8. Rake In Live Games Is Usually Higher

Although online players complain about rake a lot, live games are much harsher in this regard. It is especially true for lower stakes, where you��ll often have to accept the fact a decent percentage of every pot you win goes to the house.

It��s worth noting that some of the games have an uncapped rake, meaning they will take a fixed percentage from every single pot, no matter how big it is. These are the games you should usually avoid unless you are up against extremely weak competition.

Also, you aren��t likely to get ��normal�� rake back in live games.

While some rooms do run promotions and leaderboards where you can get some of it back, this isn��t a standard feature, and that amount is likely to be very small. That being said, we have to understand the casino��s perspective as well.

They have a fixed number of tables and can��t duplicate these spots like their online counterparts to increase the profits. In the end, they still need to earn enough money to cover their costs, but players are the ones who end up paying the price through the rake.

9. Online Play Offers Much More Flexibility

If you play online poker, you can fire up your client and find some tables running pretty much whenever you feel like playing. Day or night, there are usually some games, especially in larger rooms, with decent traffic.

So, you have all the freedom in the world to set your own schedule, especially if you��re playing cash games. This isn��t the case with live poker.

Most live casinos and poker rooms will spread games in the afternoon and during the night, with heavy traffic on the weekends. If you��re looking to find good live games, you��ll often have to play late into the night, and Fridays and Saturdays will pretty much be reserved for poker.

So, if freedom and flexibility are important for you, online poker is probably a better option. Live games can be a lot of fun if you enjoy the atmosphere, but you��ll need to adjust your schedule around them, not the other way around.

A Matter Of Personal Preference

As you can see, there are quite a few differences between online and live poker. Whichever you choose, it��s important to understand and accept these differences and weigh them up in advance.

If you don��t enjoy the presence of other people or don��t feel comfortable playing through nights, live poker may not be for you.

But if you have solid foundations and don��t mind a somewhat slower game pace, you should be able to maintain decent win-rates in most live games and have no problems gradually building your bankroll to move up in stakes.

Live games are just so much softer.

This guide outlines everything there is to know about the number of decks in blackjack and how this can impact your overall long-term success.

How Many Decks Are Used In Blackjack?

Blackjack games use one to eight decks, with only an even number of decks used (apart from the single-deck blackjack version). In theory, there��s no fixed maximum limit on the number of decks, but casinos keep this limit to eight decks.

Typically standard 52-card decks are used. And as always, all of the cards have set values (face cards are worth ten points, number cards have their number value, while the ace can be either 1 or 11).

That said, depending on the blackjack variation you��re playing, you might find that the number of cards in the deck differs. For instance, if you play a popular blackjack variation like Spanish 21, you��ll play with only 48 cards. This is because this version removes the number 10 cards from the deck.

How Many Decks Do Casinos Use?

Nowadays, the two most common variations you��ll see in casinos are six and eight-deck blackjack. This means the deck you��re playing with will have either 312 or 416 cards. Many Las Vegas casinos have almost entirely removed single-deck blackjack games from their venues. While you can still find games with two and four decks, these aren��t as common either.

One of the biggest reasons why casinos moved away from single-deck blackjack is to ensure fairness and maintain the game��s high complexity. As blackjack players mastered card counting techniques with single-deck blackjack, introducing more decks made it increasingly difficult to use this method.

Additionally, from a practical perspective, with more decks, players can play several rounds before the dealer has to shuffle the cards. Of course, there��s also another crucial factor worth considering when it comes to the overall deck number. This brings us to the next point.

How Does The Number Of Decks Affect The House Edge?

It��s a commonly known fact among experienced blackjack players that the number of decks directly correlates to the overall house edge. To fully understand this, it��s essential to make a differentiation between probability and odds.

In other words, the odds remain the same, regardless if you��re playing single-deck, four-deck, or eight-deck blackjack. However, as the number of decks increases, the probability lowers.

This might sound complicated, but it��s all quite simple math. The reason why the house edge increases is that your percentage of getting blackjack slightly lowers. In a single-deck blackjack game, if you get an Ace as your first card, 16 out of the remaining 51 cards are worth 10 points and will help you make 21. This is rounded up to 31.4%.

Now, let��s say you��re playing an eight-deck blackjack variation and receive an Ace. In this case, 128 out of the remaining 415 cards are worth ten points. Put into percentages, this is just over 30.8%. This discrepancy doesn��t seem like much, but the nearly 0.6% change can make a significant difference if you play thousands or tens of thousands of hands.

Moreover, this doesn��t just apply to your chances of getting a blackjack hand. The probability of winning a hand after splitting and doubling also falls off slightly the more decks are in play. All of these factors contribute to the overall difference in house edge between games using varying numbers of decks.

Variations Of The Number Of Decks And Their House Edge

Understanding how many decks can be used in blackjack and how the number of decks affects the house edge, let��s also dive deeper into the specific house edge percentages of each of the popular blackjack variations.

It is worth mentioning that house edge also depends on specific rules, like whether you are allowed to double after splitting, or whether the dealer will hit or stand on soft 17. That said, here��s the approximate house edge for different blackjack variants:

• Single-Deck Blackjack – 0.15% House Edge
• Double-Deck Blackjack – 0.34% House Edge
• 4-Deck Blackjack – 0.49% House Edge
• 6-Deck Blackjack – 0.55% House Edge
• 8-Deck Blackjack – 0.57% House Edge

The prerequisite for these numbers is that you��re playing every variation optimally so that there��s no human factor that can affect these numbers. As you can see from the single-deck to the eight-deck variation, the difference in house edge is a notable 0.42%. This can make a substantial impact on your bankroll over time.

What Is The Best Variation To Play And Why?

If you want the lowest house edge and, therefore, a higher chance of winning, the answer is simple �� single-deck blackjack is the best variation to play. There are not many secrets behind this. It simply boils down to math and percentages.

Keep in mind that the fewer decks there are in the game, the lower the house edge will be. Of course, this is if you��re playing the game optimally and using a blackjack strategy chart to ensure you always make the right decision based on your hand and the dealer��s up card.

Moreover, if you��re playing it live in a casino, single-deck blackjack is also the best variation to pick for card counting. Just be aware that casinos frown upon this and that you might get banned from the venue if you get caught counting cards.

With all of this said, if you��re a casual blackjack player, it��s more important to master the basics of the game than to focus on playing the blackjack variation with the lowest number of decks. Ultimately, this factor only comes into play if you��ve already optimized your decision-making and want to lower the house edge as much as possible.

Lead image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

The main feature of Free Bet Blackjack is that players can double and split for free. The first casino to introduce this blackjack variation was the Golden Nugget back in 2012. The variation became an instant success among the players and quickly spread to many other casinos.

In this guide, we��ll cover everything you need to know about Free Bet Blackjack, including how to play it, the rule changes, and strategic tips to give yourself the best long-term winning odds.

How Does Free Bet Blackjack Differ From Traditional Blackjack?

There are a few notable differences compared to standard blackjack. The first is the free double option on all hard totals of 9, 10, or 11. When the player picks the free double option, their initial bet is matched and they receive a free bet button. They will also receive only one more card.

The free double option allows the player to win more without risking any extra money. If they win the bet, they will win double the original amount that they wagered and get their initial bet back. If they lose the hand, they will only lose their original bet instead of losing twice as much as they would in a standard blackjack game.

The second big difference compared to standard blackjack is the free split option. Players can split any pair except 10s without adding extra money. The split works like it does in standard blackjack. However, just like with the free double option, when the player splits, they don��t have to match their original wager, but instead get a free bet button next to their second hand.

Another interesting difference between standard blackjack and Free Bet Blackjack is that the latter becomes more favorable for the player as there are more decks in the game. The main reason for this is that players have more free splitting options with a six or eight-deck variation than a single-deck one.

Push 22 Side Bet

Lastly and most importantly, the dealer pushes on 22. This means if the dealer busts with a total of 22, and you have 21 or under, the result is a push, and you get your wager back. You can place a Push 22 side bet if you think that the dealer will bust with this total. The payouts for the Push 22 side bet are:

• Dealer 22 Total With Same Suit – 50:1 Payout
• Dealer 22 Total With Same Color – 20:1 Payout
• Any Other Dealer 22 – 7:1 Payout

While these payout numbers might look enticing, the Push 22 side bet is generally not a good option. This is because the probability of the dealer landing a 22 total is just over 7%. Knowing this, it��s a fun bet to take occasionally for entertainment value, but it��s not a good wager to place regularly, as your bankroll would suffer.

Pot of Gold Side Bet

In addition to the Push 22 side bet, some land-based and online casinos also offer a Free Bet Blackjack side bet called Pot of Gold. This side bet rewards players with increasingly generous payouts for every additional free bet accumulated during the hand.

This optional wager is potentially even more rewarding than the previous one. However, note that the house edge jumps to around 5.7% when taking this side bet. With that in mind, here��s the rundown of the payouts for the Pot of Gold side bet in Free Bet Blackjack, depending on the amount of free bets accrued:

• 7 Free Bets – 1,000:1 Payout
• 6 Free Bets – 300:1 Payout
• 5 Free Bets – 100:1 Payout
• 4 Free Bets – 60:1 Payout
• 3 Free Bets – 30:1 Payout
• 2 Free Bets – 10:1 Payout
• 1 Free Bet – 3:1 Payout

Free Bet Blackjack Rules

Most of the Free Bet Blackjack rules are similar to those in standard blackjack, so it��s not difficult for players to transition to this variation. The game is typically played with six standard decks, and blackjacks pay 3:2.

Your goal is to hit 21, or as close to it as possible, without going over that amount.

The dealer hits on soft 17. Players can take insurance, but there��s no surrender option. Additionally, players can double after splitting and resplit pairs for up to four hands. That said, players can double on two cards only.

How To Play Free Bet Blackjack Step-by-Step

Free Bet Blackjack plays very similarly to standard blackjack. But, to make sure you understand how the entire hand plays out, here��s a close step-by-step overview of how to play Free Bet Blackjack:

1. The players place their bets for the upcoming round.
2. The dealer distributes two face-up cards to every player in the game. They also deal themselves one face-up card and one face-down card.
3. If the dealer��s up-card is worth ten points, they will check for blackjack. If their face-up card is an Ace, they will also offer the players the option of taking insurance.
4. Depending on their cards, the players will be offered the option of splitting or doubling for free.
5. The players play out their hands until they stand on their total or bust out. After this, the dealer completes their hand.
6. The dealer compares the cards of the remaining players to their hand to determine which players have won.
7. The dealer pays out the winning players, and a new round of Free Bet Blackjack begins.

Strategies For Free Bet Blackjack

Like standard blackjack, Free Bet Blackjack has a basic strategy you should always follow to make sure you make the right decision for every hand you receive based on what the dealer is showing.

That said, in general, the strategy is more aggressive compared to classic blackjack, as the dealer pushes on 22, which is very unfavorable for the player. To counter this, a simple rule of thumb is that you should take advantage of every opportunity for a free split or free double.

Specifically, regardless of the dealer��s hand, free double any hand total between 9 and 11. When playing with your free hand, you can also afford to be more aggressive and hit on up to 17 if the dealer��s up-card is at least a seven or higher.

To ensure optimal decision-making, it��s best to use a detailed Free Bet Blackjack strategy chart that will tell you exactly what you should do based on your hand and the dealer��s face-up card.

Pros & Cons Of Free Bet Blackjack

In order to decide if this blackjack variation is the right pick for you, it��s important to understand the most significant pros and cons of this version compared to the standard one. So, let��s go over the biggest benefits and drawbacks that mark this game.

Advantages Of Free Bet Blackjack

Free Bet Blackjack has several clear advantages, which include:

• Free Split – Free Bet Blackjack allows splitting on all pairs except 10s. Moreover, players can resplit up to four hands.
• Free Double – Players get a free double option and can even double after splitting without having to bet any additional money.
• 3:2 Payouts – Another advantage of Free Bet Blackjack is that it generally offers 3:2 payouts for blackjack in most places where it��s available. This is better than classic blackjack, which typically pays just 6:5.

Disadvantages Of Free Bet Blackjack

As no casino game comes without its drawbacks, it��s always essential to look at the other side of the coin. Considering that, here are the biggest disadvantages of Free Bet Blackjack:

• Higher House Edge – Although Free Bet Blackjack still offers a pretty decent house edge of around 1%, this isn��t as low as what you can get when playing the simplest, classic blackjack variation.
• No Surrender Option – Like the previous disadvantage, this one is also likely a deal-breaker for advantage players looking for maximum value. Having the option to surrender and get half of your stake back is a very valuable feature for those looking to maximize their blackjack bankroll.
• Dealer Pushes on 22 – This rule practically negates any advantage you obtain by the free split and double options, and your Free Bet Blackjack odds are evened out. This is a small but significant change, as you would otherwise win all such hands in standard blackjack.

Considering all of the above, Free Bet Blackjack is a fun and unique variant with a lot to offer. It is even a better choice than most other blackjack variations. Nevertheless, this version is still less favorable than classic single-deck blackjack for those looking for the best long-term value.

Lead image credit: Kitreel/Shutterstock

Hopefully, these tips will help protect you and your bankroll, especially if you regularly play in private games.

1. Don��t Play With Shady Characters

As a poker player, there’s nothing wrong with looking for ��spots.��

You want to play with people who are bad at poker but have plenty of money to put on the tables.

However, if you��re playing in private games, you should be very careful about the lineup, especially if you get invited to a new game.

Whether it��s through marking cards or using some other system (see: the Tip Scam or false deals), you��ll be much more likely to get cheated in a game filled with or run by shady characters.

Of course, this isn��t always easy to recognize, and sometimes you��ll have no idea you��ve been set up. But sometimes it��s blatantly obvious.

The very minimum you can do for yourself is to stay away from suspicious games.

As a poker player, you should be able to ��read�� people to some extent, so use these skills when deciding where you do and don��t want to play.

If you��re being promised a game full of rich fish by someone who doesn��t even know you that well, you should ask yourself why they picked you for this awesome ��opportunity��?

2. Pay Attention To How Players Handle Their Cards

There are tons of different ways to mark cards these days, but most cheaters aren��t particularly sophisticated.

The most common way to mark cards on the spot is by making slight markings on the edges using your fingernails.

Now, it��s perfectly common for players to shuffle their cards around and even lift them from the table. It happens all the time in private games and casinos alike.

However, if someone��s paying too much attention to their cards and seems to be squeezing them weirdly, it might be a sign they��re up to no good.

Don��t be too quick to call someone out, though.

Calling someone a cheater at the poker table is a serious accusation and a big insult for most honest players, so you have to play it smart.

Observe, but keep your observations to yourself for the time being.

3. Look For Unusual Physical Markings On The Cards

If you have a reason to believe a player is marking cards in some way, you should look for any unusual marks at the back of the cards.

Are there small, barely visible cuts, or have edges been bent slightly?

The most efficient way to go about this is to pay attention to big cards like aces and kings.

When using these on-the-spot card marking techniques, cheaters usually don��t have enough time to come up with an elaborate scheme to mark the entire deck.

Instead, they��ll try to make important cards stand out, which will provide them with quite a bit of an edge if they can get away with it.

4. Be On The Lookout For Unusual Play Patterns

Unfortunately, there are way more advanced techniques for marking cards these days.

Invisible ink that can only be seen using special glasses or under special lightning is usually impossible to detect by the naked eye, no matter how hard you look.

This is why you should always stay alert when you play poker and be particularly careful about highly unusual situations.

Sure, it happens every now and then that someone calls down a big bluff with queen high, but it��s hardly a common occurrence in regular games.

If there are too many weird hands happening in a short period of time, it might be a sign that something isn��t right.

You can share your concerns with the floor in a casino or an official poker room, and they��ll usually look into it for you.

In private games, though, things can be a bit trickier.

It��s not only that you need to be pretty sure there is cheating going on, but you must also worry about who else is in on it.

If the person running the game knows about it, your complaints won��t be welcomed, which circles back to the first point.

5. Ask For A New Deck

No matter where you��re playing, there is usually nothing wrong with asking for a new deck if you suspect there’s cheating going on with marked cards.

However, if you��re in a private game and don��t feel safe, you don��t have to state the reason why you��re asking for the change.

That way, if your request is met with hostility of some sort, you can still get out of trouble by laughing it off and saying something along the lines of the current deck not being particularly kind to you.

Even if the person in charge knows about the cheating, they��ll usually let it go at this point as they don��t want to upset their other potential marks.

Of course, they will most likely come up with a reason why they can��t change the deck, but at least you��ll have a pretty good idea of where you��re at.

6. Don��t Be Afraid To Leave

You can��t fix the world, and you can��t win in a rigged game.

Even if you play your best and get very lucky, eventually, they��ll get you.

And why would you want to spend a second more than you have to in a game where you suspect the deck is marked?

If you feel something isn��t right, simply get up, cash your chips out, and leave.

You don��t owe anyone an explanation as to why you��re leaving but you can always come up with an excuse.

Understandably, you might be afraid to share your suspicions in a completely new environment where you only know one or two people, and you shouldn��t feel bad about it.

Once the dust settles, you can maybe talk to the person who invited you to the game and share your concerns, but only if you��re pretty sure they aren��t in on it.

If you have your doubts, don��t go there again. That��s the easiest and the best way to protect yourself!

7. Don��t Be Too Paranoid

While it��s important to stay safe, you shouldn��t be too paranoid about marked cards and other forms of cheating to the point where you��ll start seeing them everywhere.

It��ll just ruin your overall experience and it won��t be long before you can��t find a good game because you think they��re all rigged somehow.

I��ve seen and experienced all sorts of things in poker and have personally played some very strange hands and got extremely unlucky bad beats.

So try not to jump to conclusions and pass judgment based on a few isolated incidents.

If there are several different indicators, though, such as these things happening way too often, the game host refusing to switch the deck, etc., it��s fine to move on and look for a new game.

That said, the biggest advice is to avoid any unknown private games in the first place.

The cheating technology could be way more advanced than we think, so I wouldn’t even consider joining suspicious games.

The best thing to do is stay in regulated poker rooms, where you will be very likely to get help when needed.

You can always ask to exchange decks, inspect the one that is used, and have all your concerns answered.

Better to be safe than sorry.

This hands-on experience gives players the feeling that they are in control of their success. But to what extent is this true?

What Are Skill-Based Slot Machines?

As their name suggests, skill-based slot machines are slot games that require a degree of skill and give the player more control of the gameplay.

This is done through bonus rounds or mini games that can test players on skills such as puzzle-solving, coordination, memory, or even reaction time.

While these skill slots still involve a high degree of chance, the outcome isn��t entirely up to luck. Two players playing the same skill-based slot in different ways will have two distinct gambling experiences.

How Are Skill Game Machines Different From Regular Slot Machines?

In a regular slot game, the outcome is determined by an RNG (Random Number Generator). This is an algorithm that randomly determines where the reels land. This ensures that the game is unpredictable and fair. There is nothing you can do to influence the outcome of a spin.

In fact, the entire process of playing a regular slot can be automated so that the player doesn��t even have to spin the reels. This is done using the “autoplay” option. The player is effectively a viewer in this instance.

In comparison, a skill-based slot machine includes an RNG, but also factors in the player��s ability to play the bonus game. In this sense, skill-based slots can be compared to video poker. Both require you to make decisions that impact how much money you could win.

Standard slots also have a set RTP (return to player) percentage. RTP is the percentage of wagered money a slot will pay back to players over time. So, the higher the RTP, the better your chance of winning.

Skill-based slot machines also have RTP percentages, but there’s a crucial difference. The RTP of a skill-based slot incorporates the highest possible level of skill a player can achieve during the skill-based bonus round.

In other words, if a player reaches the highest level of skill possible, they could potentially achieve the game’s maximum RTP. 

How Do Skill-Based Gaming Machines Work?

A skill-based slot has the same basic layout and function as a standard slot game. The main aim is to create winning combinations of symbols on reels. Some of these combinations trigger bonus rounds, and this is where the main difference comes into play.

Once you trigger the bonus round in a skill-based slot, you will be required to complete a task or challenge. Your proficiency in this bonus game then influences the size of your payout.

For instance, let��s say you��re playing a game with a Tetris theme and trigger a bonus by connecting a set number of symbols on the screen.

In the following mini-game, you��d be taken to a new screen, where you have to play a standard Tetris game and align shapes for as long as you can. The better you perform, the more rewarding your bonus would be.

There are many different skill-based slot themes, from fighting and racing mini-games to popping balloons and playing Candy Crush-style games.

Are They Really Based On Skill?

Skill-based slots unquestionably require a degree of skill.

A player who masters the mini-games or bonus rounds should see better results in the long run than one who doesn��t. In this way, they are based on skill.

However, the “skill” aspect is usually confined to the bonus rounds, rather than present throughout the entire game. For instance, where the symbols land on the reels remains totally random through the use of RNGs.

In short, you��ll need both skill and luck to win. These skill-based slots are still rooted in randomness and far from being an accepted game of skill, like poker.

The aim is to provide a more immersive and engaging experience for the player, while still retaining the luck and chance elements that make slot games exciting.

How Do You Win On Skill Machines?

To give yourself the best chance of winning on skill machines, you should, if possible, try them in demo mode first.

Playing a skill-based slot in demo mode enables you to learn the ins and outs of its gameplay without risking any money. Then, as you master the skill aspect of the game and learn how to play it, you can switch over to a real money casino.

This will put you in the best position to maximize your overall winnings, but you should not expect to beat the game overall. The house always has an edge no matter what you play.

Are Skill Machines Legal?

The legality of skill-based slot machines varies significantly between countries and between states within the US, often depending on the definition of a “skill-based” slot in state law.

Let’s take a closer look at the legality in the US.

As of now, a few US states have officially legalized the use of skill-based slot machines. These states include Nevada (approved by the Nevada Gaming Commission in 2015) and New Jersey (approved by The New Jersey Division of Gaming Enforcement in 2016).

But that’s not to say they are illegal in other states. Rather, in the majority of states, there has not been specific legislation passed, and so it’s a bit of a gray area.

For example, The Pennsylvania Gaming Control Board (PGCB) has been progressive in its implementation of new gaming options, legalizing online casinos, poker, sports betting, lottery, VGTs (video gaming terminals) at truck stops, and more in 2017, but has not specifically mentioned skill-based slot machines.

Likewise, while Delaware has legalized online gambling and many forms of gaming, there’s currently no specific information on the legality of skill-based slots. This also applies to states like Virginia, Texas, Michigan and Iowa.

That said, even if there’s no state-wide legislation, individual casinos may have their own policies in place.

Their legality can also be subject to change as states update their gambling regulations. So, it’s always crucial to check the individual state law and/or relevant gaming commission website.

There are also states where skill-based slots are illegal, such as Georgia, Florida, South Carolina, Tennessee, and Utah.

The Benefits of Skill Machines

Skill-based slots have several advantages over standard luck-based games. Here are some of the biggest benefits of skill-based machines compared to classic slots:

• Player engagement: Though standard slots are loved by older generations, the lack of interactive features make them less appealing to younger generations. Skill-based slots change this by adding an element of gamification.
• It��s not all luck: Arguably, the most important benefit from many players�� perspective is that skill-based slots provide a sense of control.
• Potential for more winnings: With the requirement of skill comes the theoretical potential for increased winnings, if you are adept at the bonus game. But remember, you can’t influence any part of the base game.

The Dangers of Skill Machines

While skill-based machines bring several intriguing and engaging benefits to the table, it��s also crucial to go over the potential disadvantages and even dangers of these games.

• The house still wins: Even with skill involved, the odds are still weighted toward the house, meaning that skilled play does not guarantee a return.
• The skill required can vary: Depending on the game you play, the amount or type of skill required can vary. It may be easier to master the bonus game in one skill-based slot than another.
• More accessible to minors: Skill-based machines have started popping up in businesses that don��t primarily specialize in gambling, such as gas stations, grocery stores, and small businesses. This makes them conveniently available to everyone, even those who can’t legally gamble. If not carefully overseen, this can grow into a concerning issue on both a personal and societal level.

A List Of Popular Skill-Based Slot Machines

While skill-based slots still represent a small drop in the sea of slot games, there are already many thrilling games you can try. Here��s our top 10 list:

1. Space Invaders (Scientific Games): One of the most polished and exciting skill-based slots is Scientific Games�� Space Invaders, based on the notable arcade game released in 1978.
2. Seinfeld (Scientific Games): Based on one of the most popular sitcoms of all time, this skill-based machine by Scientific Games includes all of the iconic Seinfeld characters and several bonus mini-games.
3. Wrecking Ball (IGT): This slot from the legendary developer IGT includes a Smash Bonus feature, which enables you to drive a truck and control a wrecking ball to smash your way to bonuses.
4. Arkanoid (Next Gaming): Next Gaming reimagined the classic 1986 arcade game with hidden features and cash prizes.
5. Danger Arena (GameCo): Released back in 2016, Danger Arena is dubbed ��the first skill-based video game gambling machine��. This machine simulates a first-person shooter game, complete with a console-style controller.
6. Locked and Loaded (Synergy Blue): Synergy Blue is known for its sizable library of skill-based machines, but this Wild West-themed game is among its best-known.
7. Safari Match (Synergy Blue): Another hit from Synergy Blue, this tile-matching skill-based machine utilizes touchscreen gameplay and a colorful savannah theme.
8. Nothin�� But Net 2 (GameCo): In this basketball-themed game, players control a basketball shooter and have to time their button presses to release the ball at the right time.
9. PAC-MAN Battle Casino (Gamblit): This is a battle royale type of skill-based game in which several players control their own PAC-MAN character and compete against one another to achieve the best score.
10. Skyriser (Banilla Games): The Skyriser game includes seven games with unique themes, offering players countless hours of entertainment across different game niches.

A Summary Of Skill-Based Slot Machines

Skill-based slot machines, which incorporate aspects of skill alongside traditional slot play, represent a noteworthy shift in casino game design. They aim to attract a younger demographic who have grown up playing video games and appreciate the interactive, competitive elements these slots bring to the table.

But they are not entirely skill-based, as players have no control over the base game. And the RTP, which basically represents the likelihood of a return, is based on the player achieving the top-level of skill required for the bonus game!

And then there’s the legal landscape, which remains varied. While states such as Nevada and New Jersey have approved them, many others haven’t legislated their use, creating a legal gray area and illustrating the need for broader regulatory consideration as skill-based gaming continues to evolve.

• The game starts with the casino dealer shuffling the deck(s) of cards, ensuring they are properly mixed up before the start of the game.
• Once the game starts, the dealer gives two cards to each player, including themselves, usually starting from their left and dealing clockwise. One of the dealer’s cards is face up (up-card) and the other is face down (hole card).
• After all blackjack cards are dealt, the dealer moves from player to player, left to right, to see if they want to hit (get another card) or stand (keep their current hand).
• Once all players have completed their turns, the dealer reveals their hole card. Depending on the total in their hand and the house rules, the dealer may then hit or stand.
• The dealer then compares their hand to the players’ hands. Players with a higher total than the dealer’s, up to 21, win their bets. If the dealer has a higher total, the player loses their bet. If it’s a tie, the player’s bet is returned in what’s called a ‘push.’

Blackjack is a fairly easy game to follow as a player, but there are a lot of nuances to pay attention to with blackjack dealing. With that in mind, we��ve prepared a step-by-step guide on how to deal blackjack, including all blackjack dealer rules.

1. Have players place their bets
2. Deal one face-up card to every player
3. Place one face-down card in front of you
4. Deal the second face-up card to everyone
5. Deal additional cards as requested
6. Show your face-down card and make your hand
7. Compare hands to determine the winner
8. Collect all cards to end the round

Step 1: Have Players Place Their Bets

Once you��ve shuffled and cut the cards, but before you deal them, have all of the players place their bets. The players who want to participate in the upcoming hand do so by making their bets at this point.

Players who decide to be in the game will have to place their chips in the small circle or box in front of them. If the blackjack table doesn��t include this area, the players can simply put their chips next to the area where you��ll place their cards.

Any player who doesn��t make a bet before you start dealing won��t receive any cards and can��t participate in the round.

Remember, as the dealer, you don��t have to place any bets. You��re acting as the ��house.�� In a home game, players should rotate after each hand, so each person acts as the dealer at one point.

Step 2: Deal One Face-Up Card To Every Player

After the players have placed their bets, you can start dealing. The proper way to deal blackjack cards is to distribute them from left to right.

Take the top card from the deck (or the first card from the blackjack card shoe if you��re using one) and deal it to the leftmost player at the table.

Gently slide the card across the table and turn it face up while doing so. Place the first player��s card in the designated box in front of them. Continue the same with every following player until everyone in the round has one face-up card in front of them.

Whether you��re dealing at home or in a professional setting, keep in mind that only you can touch the cards. The players can��t touch their cards even to adjust them.

Step 3: Place One Face-Down Card In Front Of You

Once every player in the round has their face-up card, you should take the top card from the deck or the card shoe and place it face-down in front of yourself.

It��s crucial to keep the card hidden from all of the players in the game until it��s time to reveal it, so be careful when taking it from the deck. At this point, you shouldn��t look at the card either.

Step 4: Deal The Second Face-Up Card To Everyone

Starting with the leftmost player, deal one more card to every player in the game. Distribute the cards in the same fashion as before, flipping them as you slide them.

When placing the second face-up card, set it to cover the majority of the first face-up card, with the first card��s number still visible in the left corner.

This time, you will also deal one face-up card to yourself. As you previously did with the players’ cards, you should place your face-up card over the face-down one, covering most of it.

If you��re playing in a dealing blackjack in a home game, it��s also good to agree upfront on whether you��ll include the insurance side bet.

Any player can take this side bet if you, as the dealer, are showing an Ace as your face-up card. The insurance bet pays the player 2:1 if you make a blackjack hand.

Step 5: Deal Additional Cards

Now that every player has two face-up cards, it��s time to proceed to the decision-making part of the game. You start this part of the round with the first player on your left.

Depending on the strength of their hand, the player will choose to either stand, hit, double down, split, or surrender:

How do You Deal Blackjack if The Player Wants To Stand

Let��s say that the first player is happy with their two-card total and decides to stand. In that case, you will simply move on to the next player. The player who stands won��t receive any additional cards.

How do You Deal Blackjack if The Player Wants To Hit

If a player chooses to hit, that means they want you to give them another card. Place every subsequent card in the same manner as the first two cards.

A player can choose to hit for as many times as they want, as long as they don��t go over 21. For optimal decision-making, it��s best that players follow the proven tips and strategies on when to hit in blackjack and have a blackjack strategy chart by their side.

If a player who decides to hit ��busts�� and goes over 21, collect their money.

Once a player decides to stop hitting or busts, move to the next player at the table. In most casinos, dealers also take the player��s cards after they bust out and put them in the discard pile.

That said, you can also leave their cards on the table until the end of the game and collect them with all the other cards once the round finishes.

How do You Deal Blackjack if The Player Wants To Double Down

Depending on their two-card value, a player might also decide to double down.

In short, doubling down in blackjack is when a player asks for only one additional card, after which they must stand on their total no matter what it is. To make this play, they must additionally wager the amount matching their initial bet.

How do You Deal Blackjack if The Player Wants To Split

In some situations, a player might receive a pair of cards with the same value. When this happens, they will have the option of splitting the hand into two separate hands and playing them individually.

When a player decides to split, they must double their initial bet by placing a wager equal to the original amount.

Once you separate the pair into two hands, start dealing the hand on your left. You should always play out the entire left hand until the player stands or busts before moving to the right hand. Never deal alternately to the two hands.

An additional consideration in this case is that blackjack doesn��t pay the standard 3:2. Instead, you should pay them 1:1.

How do You Deal Blackjack if The Player Wants To Surrender

Lastly, some casinos also allow players to surrender if they��re not happy with the hand they��ve been dealt. If you��re playing blackjack at home and the main goal is to have a fun and light time, it��s a good idea to include this option.

When a player surrenders, they forfeit their hand in return for getting half of their original bet back.

Surrendering can be a solid strategy in some cases for players to preserve their bankroll. There are many clear-cut situations on when to surrender in blackjack.

As the dealer, you should collect half of their bet and move on to the next player.

Step 6: Show Your Face-Down Card And Make Your Hand

After every player at the table has finished their turn, it��s time for you to reveal your hand total. As the dealer, you��re always the last one to act. This rule ensures you have the advantage as the house.

Take your face-up card and lightly sweep under the face-down card while turning it at an angle in order to flip the face-down card over in one motion. This reveals your two-card total to all of the people at the table.

As the dealer, you can��t arbitrarily choose when you want to hit or stand. Instead, there are predetermined rules you must stick to.

The general rule in both land-based and real money online casinos is that the dealer must hit on every total that��s 16 or under. In other words, you can only stand if you have a two-card total of 17 to 21.

However, there��s one more consideration to keep in mind. If you��re playing at home, it��s important to decide whether you, as the dealer, should hit or stand on a soft 17. For reference, in most casinos, the blackjack dealing rules dictate that the dealer should always hit when they have a soft 17 hand.

Step 7: Compare Hands To Determine The Winner

Finally, after you��ve played your hand according to the previously outlined blackjack dealer rules, it��s time to compare it to the hands of the remaining players. You will need to determine which players have a stronger hand than you.

Start with the leftmost player and compare their hand to yours:

• If they have a higher-valued hand, you should pay them 1:1, meaning their payout will equal the bet they placed at the beginning of the round.
• If the player��s total matches yours, the result is a push. In this case, neither side wins, and the player gets their initial bet back.
• If a player has a blackjack (two-card hand worth 21), you should pay them the predetermined house payout for this hand, which is 3:2 at most casinos.

After comparing your cards and paying the player if necessary, proceed from left to right until you��ve compared your hand with all of the players in the game.

Step 8: Collect All Cards To End The Round

After paying the players and settling all of the bets, it��s time to end the round and collect all of the cards on the table.

First, sweep your cards from left to right. Then, starting with the rightmost player��s hand, collect all of the face-up cards from right to left. Skilled blackjack dealers can collect all of the players�� cards in one long, sweeping motion.

As you collect all of the cards that were used in the round, put them in the discard pile on your right side. In casinos, dealers have a dedicated discard tray where they put the used cards.

If you��re playing single-deck blackjack, you can put the cards back in the deck and shuffle all of the cards.

To start a new blackjack round, revert to step one of this guide and repeat.

Summary On How To Deal In Blackjack – Key Blackjack Dealer Rules

Hopefully this detailed step-by-step guide has helped you master dealing blackjack at home or in a casino. But before we wrap up, here are some key takeaways on blackjack dealer rules you should remember:

• The dealer in blackjack must always hit on a total of 16 or lower and stand on a total of 17 or higher.
• When acting as the dealer in home games, agree on house rules for the dealer on a soft 17.
• Inform all players of the option of taking insurance when the situation presents itself.
• In home games, agree whether you will offer the players the option of surrendering.
• Always deal the cards from left to right and play through the leftmost player��s hand first, before moving to each of the following players at the table.

You first place an ‘Ante’ bet, before three cards are dealt to each player and the dealer. The dealer’s cards are dealt face down. You then decide to either fold your hand or continue playing by placing a ‘Play’ bet. That’s it! The dealer then reveals their three-card hand – if your hand beats the dealer’s qualified hand (Queen or higher), you win.

How To Play 3 Card Poker

Once you have taken your seat at a 3 Card Poker table, whether at a land-based or online casino, you��ll be asked to make your first bet.

1. Place your bet: The Ante bet box will be sitting empty in front of you, and you will be asked to place some chips there. You��ll be able to place any bet within the table stakes, between a minimum and maximum bet.
2. Cards are dealt: Once you��ve placed your Ante and other players at the table have done the same, the dealer will deal everyone three cards, including themselves.
3. Decide whether to play or fold you hand: Once you have your three cards, your only decision will be whether to keep them by placing the Play bet or to discard them right away. In truth, you will want to keep going with most hands in 3 Card Poker, but more on this a bit later in the strategy section. If you do decide to place a play bet, you will have to match your Ante bet in full, doubling your total bet. You should be ready to bet the whole amount when starting a hand, as this is the only way you will get to showdown.
4. The dealer’s hand is revealed: Once all the bets are placed, and players who don’t wish to proceed have discarded their cards, the hand goes to showdown. The dealer turns over their cards, and every player��s hand is compared to the dealer��s.
5. Winner is determined and payouts given: The dealer must have a Queen or higher to qualify. If the dealer doesn’t qualify (has a Jack-high or worse), you receive even money on your Ante bet and the Play bet is returned to you. If the dealer qualifies and your hand is better, you receive even money on both the Ante and Play bets. If the dealer’s hand is better, you lose both bets. In case of a tie, both the Ante and Play bets are returned to you.

3 Card Poker Rules

The rules of 3 Card Poker couldn��t be simpler. You only have two options to choose from after being dealt cards: Play and Fold.

You will forfeit your cards and your Ante bet if you decide to fold. You won��t be able to win the hand, even if the dealer has a very weak hand.

If you decide to place the Play bet, you will stay in the hand until the very end, when your cards will be compared to the dealer��s holdings.

Keep in mind that there is no drawing or discarding in 3 Card Poker, and you will only have the three cards you get dealt at your disposal, so make your decisions based on these.

When it comes to comparing hands in 3 Card Poker, it��s clear that some hands, such as full houses and four of a kind, don’t exist in this variation of the game.

Hand rankings in 3 Card Poker are as follows:

1. Royal Flush
2. Straight Flush
3. Three of a Kind
4. Straight
5. Flush
6. One Pair
7. High Card

Of course, you won’t be able to make real straights and flushes with just three cards, but three cards in a row will count as a straight, three cards of the same suit will count as a flush, etc.

This simple hand ranking should be easy enough to understand for anyone who has ever played poker, and at the end of the day, the dealer will tell you if you have won or lost anyway.

With that said, I have covered all the rules of the game you need to know about, so it��s time to talk about payouts and special bets in 3 Card Poker.

3 Card Poker Payouts

The most basic payouts in 3 Card Poker come from simply beating the dealer��s hand.

This is done by having a better poker hand than the dealer at showdown, in which case you will always win a 1:1 payout on the Ante bet.

The Play bet only comes into play if the dealer has at least a Queen high in their hand. If this happens, and you also have a winning hand, you��ll be paid at 1:1 on the Play bet as well.

Otherwise, the Play bet will be returned to you.

In addition to these payouts, the Ante Bonus will give you an additional payout if you win the hand with at least three of a kind.

The Ante Bonus payouts are as follows:

• Straight: 1:1
• Three of a Kind: 4:1
• Straight Flush: 5:1

It��s interesting to note that hand rankings in 3 Card Poker are quite different from other forms of poker, simply because getting three cards of the same suit or three consecutive cards is easier than getting three of a kind.

For that reason, there is no payout for a flush on the Ante Bonus, and the straight payout is significantly lower than the one for three of a kind.

Pair Plus Bet Payout

One last thing to keep an eye out on in 3 Card Poker is the Pair Plus bet, which is an optional bet you can make on every hand.

The Pair Plus bet is placed simultaneously with the Ante bet, and you can choose to bet any value you want.

If the Pair Plus bet is activated, you will receive the following payouts on your hand if you hold one pair or better:

• One Pair: 1:1
• Flush: 4:1
• Straight: 6:1
• Three of a Kind: 30:1
• Straight Flush: 40:1

Keep in mind that you will lose any money you place in the Pair Plus box every time you don��t make at least one pair, even if you end up winning the hand against the dealer with your high card.

3 Card Poker Odds

3 Card Poker gives the house quite a substantial edge.

On Ante and Play bets, the casino retains a house advantage of 3.37%. This is significantly higher than blackjack’s house edge, for example.

The Pair Plus bet comes with a house advantage of 2.32%, which is lower than the basic bets, making it an interesting prospect for anyone playing this game.

While the dealer and the player have the same chance of making a winning hand, the fact that your Play bet is not paid out unless the dealer has at least Queen high is what gives the house the majority of its edge.

Here are some interesting odds related to making certain big hands in 3 Card Poker, which come in handy, especially if you enjoy playing the Pair Plus bet:

• Odds to make a straight flush: 0.217%
• Odds to make three of a kind: 0.235%
• Odds to make a straight: 3.257%
• Odds to make a flush: 4.95%
• Odds to make one pair: 16.94%
• Odds to make Ace High or worse: 76.38%

As you can see, you��ll have a hand that does not contain any pair, straight or a flush, the vast majority of the time.

Best 3 Card Poker Strategy

3 Card Poker is a very simple game which means there��s not too much you can do in terms of strategy. In fact, your only concern should be which cards to keep and which to discard.

Traditionally, the optimal strategy for the game is to keep any hand that has at least a Q 6 4 in it while discarding everything weaker than this.

This may not seem like much of a strategy, but this approach will get you the best possible results in the game.

Apart from that, there are no special or fancy plays you should remember, other than the fact that the Pair Plus bet is not a negative EV (Expected Value) one compared to the Ante bet, as jackpot bets often are in poker games.

This means that, statistically, The Pair Plus bet is not a losing bet over the long run when compared to the Ante bet. However, remember that EVs are statistical measurements and don’t guarantee short-term outcomes.

Where To Play 3 Card Poker Online

The game of 3 Card Poker is quite a popular poker variation, mostly because of its simple rules and strategy, so you should be able to find it at most poker rooms.

Remember to always play at a regulated and secure operator, like the ones on our list of recommended poker sites.

Have fun playing this simple poker variation and see if you can beat the house!

In this article, I explain how the blackjack casino advantage works, what you can expect in different types of blackjack games, and how to turn the odds in your favor.

The Math: How House Edge Works

House edge or house advantage is the mathematical advantage the casino retains over players in a gambling game.

Roulette is perhaps the simplest game to explain how the house edge works. On a European roulette wheel, there is a total of 37 numbers. Yet, if you make a straight bet and win, you will get paid 35:1. Your $1 bet will turn into $36 instead of $37.

This seemingly tiny difference creates a house edge of exactly 2.7%, which can add up pretty fast, depending on the size of your overall bet.

The advantage in blackjack is a bit more complicated to explain since it changes based on the player’s action and strategy. Plus, there are different blackjack variants you can play, and each of those comes with a different theoretical blackjack house advantage.

However, when all the rules and options in blackjack are considered, the casino will retain a small edge over the player, which can only be negated by card-counting techniques in some cases.

What Is House Edge In Blackjack?

The house edge in blackjack is anywhere between 0.5% and 2%, depending on which blackjack table you sit down at and how well you apply basic strategy.

If you were to play blackjack very badly, the casino could have an even higher advantage over you, but there is no reason to allow that to happen.

By applying basic strategy and optimally playing every hand, you can bring the house edge down to 0.5%.

But, before you think about the blackjack strategy you’ll apply, it’s critical to sit down at the right blackjack table where the house rules work in your favor.

Picking The Right Blackjack Table: Elements That Change House Edge

From the very beginning, the casino gains an edge by having you go first and possibly bust your hand before the dealer even flips over their cards.

However, the dealer must also obey a certain set of rules when playing their hand, which can work in the player��s favor.

These are the elements that you should look out for when picking your blackjack table in order to give yourself the best possible odds.

1. Number of Decks

The more decks that are used to deal hands, the higher the house edge. The likelihood of making a Blackjack is highest when just one deck is used. For example, 8-deck blackjack house edge can be up to 0.25% higher than a single-deck blackjack game.

2. The Soft 17 Rule

Another rule that can work against you is the dealer hitting on soft 17. While it might seem counterintuitive, the dealer having to hit on soft 17 gives the house another 0.2% edge over the player.

3. Double After Split

Another thing that can impact the house edge in blackjack is your ability to Double after Splitting. Being able to double after splitting will allow you to make bigger bets with strong hands. This way, you can reduce the house edge by approximately 0.15%.

4. Double Down on Any Total

Many blackjack games only allow you to double down with 10 or 11. In other casinos, you may be able to double down on any total. If you can double down on any total and know when to do it, you can take away about 0.2% of the house edge.

5. Multiple Splits

Another way you can negate house edge is by playing games that allow you to split your hand multiple times. Splitting a pair of Aces is great, but re-splitting when another Ace comes off is even better. You can take off some 0.05% of the house edge by being able to re-split.

6. Early and Late Surrender

Having the option to surrender early (before the dealer checks for Blackjack) is another advantage you should look for. Playing in a game with early surrender will help you reduce the house advantage a bit more.

7. 3:2 vs 6:5 Blackjack

One final thing that casinos do to tweak the house edge is paying you 6:5 for a Blackjack instead of 3:2. You should always play in a 3:2 game instead of 6:5 if you have any option, as this will directly win you more money every time you make a Blackjack.

Overall, you want to look for games that are played with fewer decks, allow you to re-split your hands and double down after splitting, offer early surrender, and force the dealer to stand on soft 17. You should also always play 3 to 2 blackjack if possible.

Expert Tips: Strategies To Combat Blackjack��s House Edge

Now that you know what house edge is and how it works in blackjack, I’m going to give you a few additional tips that will help bring down the blackjack house advantage and improve your winning odds every time you play.

Expert Tip #1 �C Sit at the Right Table

The most important thing of all when playing blackjack is that you are playing with favorable table rules.

Take some time to find games that will allow you to re-split, double down after splitting, and surrender before the dealer looks for Blackjack.

These little details may not seem that important, but will add up over time.

Expert Tip #2 �C Never Deviate from Basic Strategy

If you want to enjoy the best possible returns and the lowest possible house edge in blackjack, you will need to play perfectly.

Fortunately, blackjack is a completely solved game, which means you don��t need to do much to play perfect strategy.

All you need to do is study basic blackjack strategy charts and stick to them in all situations and without any deviations. Do this, and the house edge will be minimized to begin with.

Expert Tip #3 �C Learn How to Count Cards

Card counting is only possible in live casinos and only in some cases. However, it can give you a massive advantage that no other strategy can.

If you can find the right game and count cards in it, you may be as much as 2% or 3% favorite against the house, and that��s a massive advantage.

Learning to count cards is also fun, so study the techniques away from the table, wait for the right spot to apply them, and beat the house at their own game.

House Edge Across Blackjack Variations

There are many different versions of blackjack that you can play in live and online casinos worldwide.

Different versions of blackjack come with different rule sets, and this impacts the house edge.

Of course, you should always look for the game with the lowest house edge possible. Here’s a quick look at the payouts and house edge in some popular blackjack variations:

Note that all of these house advantage percentages only apply if you play the basic strategy to perfection and don��t make unnecessary deviations from optimal play!

Does Counting Cards Give You An Edge Over The House?

While it’s true that the casino always has an advantage over players, this is only true if the game is played without any extra help. Blackjack house edge and card counting are closely connected.

By applying the card counting techniques that the likes of the MIT team did back in the day, you can turn the house edge in your favor.

This is especially true if the game you are playing already has favorable rules and is being played with just one or two decks.

In this case, counting cards and understanding when you have the highest chances to make Blackjack will give you an advantage over the casino and allow you to place your big bets when the odds are in your favor.

Card counting only works in live casinos and is only possible if the shoe does not contain too many decks that are often shuffled, which can be problematic these days.

Yet, if you can find a casino that does not pay attention to such details, you may be able to play blackjack profitably and win big at this game of chance.

House Edge in Blackjack vs Other Games

I have compared the different versions of blackjack and shown you that the house advantage can be as low as 0.39% and as high as 2%, depending on table rules.

But how does this compare to other gambling games, and is blackjack the best game to play in a casino? Here is a quick rundown of house edge in different casino games for reference.

• Blackjack house edge: 0.39% to 2%
• Spanish 21 house edge: 0.4% to 0.76%
• Baccarat house edge: 1.06% to 1.24%
• Craps house edge: 1.58%
• Ultimate Texas Hold’em house edge: 2.19%
• Three Card Poker house edge: 3.37%
• Roulette house edge: 1.3% to 5.26%
• Sic Bo house edge: 8%

As you can see, blackjack is one of the most favorable casino games you will find, even compared to games like craps and baccarat, which are traditionally considered to have a low house edge.

Master House Edge for a Successful Blackjack Game

Blackjack is a fun game to play, and if you play it right, you’ll always be very close to breaking even against the house.

If you’re playing in a live casino, the cost of the drinks you get for free at the table may very well cover the entire amount of your theoretical loss in any session.

Keep in mind that different blackjack rules can impact the blackjack house advantage, so make sure you always play at the best tables available.

Also remember that there is a lot of variance in gambling, including blackjack, and that some nights will go your way, and others simply won��t.

As long as you remember you are at the table to have a good time, and are able to quit when losing without chasing your losses, blackjack is one of the best games to enjoy in a casino.

These are the voices that take us through riveting high stakes, heart-breaking losses, and triumphant wins, all the while providing helpful advice and analysis. So without future ado, let’s salute 10 of the best in the business.

#1 – Norman Chad

Commentated On: World Series of Poker (WSOP)

“Someone needs to tell this guy he’s going home – he’s drawing dead!”

No-one perhaps embodies the World Series of Poker more than commentator Norman Chad, who has been commentating on many of ESPN’s poker broadcasts, including the WSOP, since 2003.

In fact, no-one could deliver the lines, “he’s been dealt Queen-Jack!” with such enthusiasm for thousands of hands ad infinitum and still make it sound interesting. But, with over-excited co-anchor Lon McEachern in tow, Chad is rightly considered one of poker’s best commentators.

While not all viewers may warm to Norman’s references to his many marriages, no one can fault his no-nonsense approach to the game and dislike of egos.

Norman Chad isn��t your guy if you want a detailed, step-by-step poker hand breakdown with tips on what a player should do in a particular situation. He’s also prone to a little quip (“Bet sizing is a key component of Texas Hold’em, but so is shirt-sizing”), and some may fault him for this light and funny approach to poker.

However, he��s one of few personalities with the power and charisma to make the game entertaining, even to someone who��s never played a single hand of Hold��em in their life. This is what makes him our favorite of the World Series of Poker commentators.

#2 – Mike Sexton

Commentated On: World Poker Tour (WPT)

“OMG! I cannot believe he just tried that!”

The dulcet tones of Mike Sexton flowed through 13 seasons of the World Poker Tour, ever since the first televised tour event aired in 2003.

With his trusty steed (former tennis pro Vince Van Patten) by his side and armed with a wardrobe of badly-fitting shirts, Sexton (and his Florida drawl) is rightly considered one of the best World Poker Tour commentators of all time.

Sexton had the rare advantage of actually being a decent player himself. He had a successful run of results in the WSOP, even before he started in front of the camera. Mike’s career tournament cashes total $6,708,146, including a WPT Montreal Main Event win in 2016.

Sadly, Sexton passed away in 2020, but his influence on the game lives on.

#3 – Jesse May

Commentated On: Late Night Poker, Poker Million, Irish Poker Open, Poker Nations Cup

The original “Voice of Poker”, Jesse May was many Brits’ primary school teacher in the late 90s and early 00s as he took a whole new generation through the bewildering world of Texas Hold’em in the iconic ‘Late Night Poker’ show.

Always assisted by the laconic tones of Nic Szeremeta, Jesse’s commentary was notable for its frequent bouts of chuckles and incredulous cries of “WHATTTT?!” as one young upstart dared to raise it up pre-flop with K-2 offsuit.

The comment itself is much funnier if you know May��s background story and how he got involved with poker commentary in the first place. Initially, ��Late Night Poker�� had no plans to have a commentator, but it turned out that players, although they were all ��characters,�� were terrified of being on camera, and there wasn��t much banter going on at all (save for late Devilfish, of course).

Jesse busted out of the tournament early on, making a play with 9-3 offsuit, so he really didn��t have much going on. He volunteered to commentate on the rest of the action, secretly hoping he would get a chance to explain his move at some point. From there, stars simply lined up for the man who would become the ��Voice of Poker.��

In 2012, Jesse was honored with a Lifetime Achievement Award at the European Poker Awards for services to the game. What a legend.

#4 – James Hartigan

Commentated On: EPT, PCA, PokerStars Shark Cage

The British journalist and broadcaster from south London started out with the BBC and commercial radio before being given his big break in gambling with the cable-based The Poker Channel (the starting out point for many British media starlets).

Currently, James can be seen fronting up the TV commentary for PokerStars�� European Poker Tour and PCA coverage on UK television.

Hartigan has formed a dynamic duo with Joe Stapleton. Joe happily takes on the role of a ��clown�� while James is the serious one that tries to tame and control young Stape��s enthusiasm. It can feel awkward at times, but that��s precisely what show producers are aiming for, and once you get used to it, it adds to the whole viewing experience.

The pair’s terrific chemistry won them the ‘Best Podcast Award for Poker in the Ears’ in 2022, while Hartigan won the ï¿½ï¿½Best Broadcaster�� award at the 4th Global Poker Awards in 2023.

#5 – Gabe Kaplan

Commentated On: Poker After Dark, High Stakes Poker

Not many people combine sitcom acting, poker playing and commentating, but then, not all people are Gabe Kaplan. Now retired, he was perhaps most famous for his stint analyzing and commentating on High Stakes Poker. Kaplan’s dry and down-to-earth demeanor was a stark contrast to the mayhem going on at the table as Negreanu, Hansen et al proceeded to knock seven shades of bankroll out of each other.

It��s fair to say Gabe was instrumental to High Stakes Poker’s huge success. While fans enjoyed watching the game��s best duke it out on the green felt, it was Kaplan��s commentary that helped people understand what was going on, and his funny remarks helped pass the time when someone would go into a long tank facing a river bet.

When Gabe and HSP parted ways, the show just wasn��t the same anymore. Kaplan wasn��t an outsider, and he personally knew many of the best poker players appearing on the show, which probably helped a lot.

“It’s funny – once someone gets a $500 tip, the cocktail waitresses [sitting in the High Stakes Poker studio] start to multiply.”

Saying it how it is….

#6 – A.J. Benza

Commentated on: High Stakes Poker

While Gabe was the star in the commentary booth of High Stakes Poker, A.J. Benza was there to keep him company throughout the first five seasons of the show. Although Benza didn��t really know much about poker at all when the show first kicked off, he and Kaplan made an interesting duo.

A.J. was happy to take the role of an ��armchair quarterback�� (as he called himself in an interview describing his experience with HSP), who asked questions and let Gabe take things from there.

The chemistry between the two was good, and poker fans warmed up to A.J. co-commentating. In fact, when he was let go at the end of Season 5 and replaced by Kara Scott, fans from all over the world urged the GSN to reconsider their decision and bring Benza back.

A.J. wasn��t thrilled about the decision, either, but he always emphasized he was very fortunate to have an opportunity to work alongside Kaplan and help make HSP the success it had become.

Then in 2020, PokerGO relaunched High Stakes Poker with Kaplan and Benza in the commentary booth once more.  

#7 – Ali Nejad

Commentated on: Poker After Dark, National Heads Up Championship

To the poker community at large, Ali Nejad is best-known for his commentary on NBC��s Poker After Dark, although he did coverage for the National Heads Up Championship as well.

Unlike many more outspoken commentators out there, Ali had a different style, mostly calling out the action and throwing in an occasional pun. He largely let the chips and the players do the talking and kept to trying to explain things where necessary.

This approach divided the fan base. To some, it seemed like just wasn��t doing much at all, save for calling out the action. Others were happy with Nejad��s style as he wasn��t spoiling the actual play or trying too hard to add commentary where it wasn��t necessary.

#8 – Lex Veldhuis

Commentated on: Triton Poker Series

Lex isn��t in the same boat as many of the others covered in this article as he��s primarily a player �C and a pretty good one, having won over $700,000 over the years. However, Veldhuis decided to take on a more active role as a poker commentator as well, covering certain events and high stakes cash game sessions taking place during various Triton Poker Series stops.

Lex may not be the showman that has an endless supply of jokes, and he doesn��t approach poker in the funny and relaxed way that some other commentators do, but that doesn��t take away anything from his commentary.

Instead of trying to make it fun for all, Veldhuis is more focused on the strategic aspect of the game, so he��ll offer his insights into hands, providing useful analysis and explanations for certain plays.

He may not make you laugh all the time, but he can definitely help you learn about the game along the way.

#9 – Tony Dunst

Commentated on: World Poker Tour

With over $4.2 million in lifetime tournament cashes, Tony Dunst is an excellent poker player in his own right. He merged his passion for the game with his desire to spread his knowledge with the rest of the world, working as a WPT commentator.

Dunst was primarily in charge of the ��Raw Deal�� segment of the show. During every WPT episode, producers would select one or two exciting hands to break it down play by play, and Dunst was the man doing the breakdown.

When Mike Sexton announced his retirement from WPT commentary, Dunst was promoted into the role.

Dunst is quite popular with the fans. His unique style of analysis with just the right dose of humor and expert opinion added some flavor to the WPT coverage.

#10 – David Tuchman

Commentated on: Live at the Bike, Full Tilt Million Dollar Cash Game, World Series of Poker, PokerStars Highlights Show, 888 Live

David Tuchman is one of the best-known voices in poker. Having started his commentating career in shows like Full Tilt Million Dollar Cash Game, he joined the World Series of Poker team in 2011, making his claim to poker fame.

Tuchman has also regularly appeared as the voice behind PokerStars Highlight shows, calling out the action for Sunday Million final tables as well as many other critical online events.

David Tuckman has also been involved with 888 Poker, commenting on their events and live streams. All in all, his name belongs to this list of the best poker commentators, and poker fans around the world will likely be listening to Tuckman��s voice for many years to come.

For similar articles, check out the Top 10 Biggest Poker Scandals Of All Time and The Most Memorable Moments In Poker History.

Of course, it’s much easier to access these stats in online games, as you can use various trackers and software which display key online poker player statistics. But even in a live setting, you can get a very solid understanding of your opponent��s play by observing them in action.

Let��s talk about what you should look out for in your games.

Skip to:

1. VPIP (Voluntarily Put $ In Pot)
2. RFI (Raise First In)
3. 3bet
4. Fold to 3bet
5. Fold to steal
6. C-bet
7. Fold to c-bet
8. Went to showdown
9. Aggression % by street
10. River call

1. VPIP (Voluntarily Put $ In Pot)

VPIP stands for ��Voluntarily Put Money ($) In Pot�� and helps you understand how often your opponent is choosing to play.

If a player performs any voluntary action like raising, calling, or even limping, and chooses to play the hand, his VPIP stat increases.

Of course, if he’s sitting in the big blind and was forced to post it because of the game structure, but then folded to a raise, this does not count as an action and does not influence this stat.

While it only gives basic information, you can profile your opponents by how often they choose to play, since many recreational players opt to get involved with way too many hands making their range too weak.

If you notice these tendencies, it can help influence your final decisions.

2. RFI (Raise First In)

Preflop raise or raise first in (RFI) shows how often the player decides to enter the pot by raising when everyone before them folds.

While good players have similar VPIP and RFI stats, since they often enter the pot by raising if they decide to play, you will find opponents who have a wide gap between these numbers.

This is a huge indication of weaker players because they usually decide to limp or call a raise instead of raising, and take passive lines post-flop most of the time.

You should look to play as many hands as possible against these players, because they will usually call your bets and rarely bluff, so you will always know where you stand.

3. 3bet

This poker statistic shows how often a player decided to re-raise instead of calling or folding when someone already entered the pot by raising.

The higher the 3bet stat, the more aggressive your opponent is.

As a rule of thumb, you should be looking to play fewer hands against players with a high 3-bet percent because you will be forced to fold a lot when facing aggression.

It is better to avoid these situations with the weakest part of your range, and only play reasonable hands or add more 4-bet bluffs in the mix.

4. Fold to 3bet

Knowing how often your opponent folds to 3-bet after raising is one of the most important online poker statistics.

If you find opponents who are opening too many hands, they are also likely folding to 3-bet too often. If that’s the case, you can add many weak hands to your 3-betting range and exploit their mistakes.

Contrary to this, if these players choose to call many 3-bets after raising with a wide range, you can exploit it by 3-betting only a strong part of your range.

No matter what, knowing this stat will help you adjust against various opponents and put them in some tough spots.

5. Fold to steal

Fold to steal shows how often a player in the blinds folds when facing a raise, and is something you should evaluate when choosing which hands to play from later positions.

The player sitting in the big blind is especially important because they get the best odds and close the action, so will likely be your main competition.

If you find an opponent who is folding a lot, you can raise with more hands than you usually would, or even open every single one of them if the big blind is particularly weak and you find yourself on the button.

Of course, if you’re up against a tough opponent who’s not so keen on folding and chooses to 3-bet a lot, the best adjustment would be to fold your weaker hands and choose a tighter approach.

Knowing how often people fold to steal can be very valuable when choosing what hands you opt to play, so always consider your opponents and how they react to your raise.

6. C-bet

Continuation betting (known as c-bet) is a situation where the preflop raiser opts to continue his aggression and bet after the flop.

If you notice how often a specific player is c-betting, you can adjust your play against them and even build your entire strategy based on this information.

Even though c-betting is a very wide and complex topic, people rarely change their strategy and mostly keep doing the same things over and over again. If you caught someone c-betting too much or way less than they should, you could make simple adjustments and exploit irregularities in their play.

Thinking about your own strategy, one thing that you should avoid is c-betting too often and then being forced to fold almost your entire range after checking.

Instead, put some medium-strength hands in the checking range to protect it, and you will be a much tougher opponent to play.

7. Fold to c-bet

The name is self-explanatory. This poker statistic shows how often your opponent folds when facing a continuation bet.

Often players chose to play too many hands and then fold to any bet if they miss the flop, which is probably one of the worst strategies to have.

Against these players, you should forget about balancing and c-bet every single time you miss yourself to take advantage of their mistakes.

However, if you’re up against a player who’s not very keen on folding, the previous strategy would cost you a lot of money. Instead of betting all your bluffs, you should choose to continue with hands that have some equity and give up with complete air.

Of course, it’s not as simple as that, but knowing how often other players are folding on the flop can help you make superior decisions, so always observe your opponents.

8. Went to showdown

Went to showdown stat lets you see how often your opponent goes to showdown after seeing the flop.

If your opponent has high ��went to showdown�� stats of more than 35%, it means you should not try to bluff them. Instead, you should be value betting more medium-strength hands, because they are not going to fold if they have any piece of the board.

Contrary to this, if your opponents rarely go to showdown, it means they are only playing very strong hands after the flop, and you should be looking to punish them every time you get a chance to bluff.

Of course, it’s way easier to observe this in online games, where you can quickly see the difference. But even in a live setting, you will notice who is calling down no matter what and who is opting to check/fold most of the hands on the flop, so make adjustments based on that information.

9. Aggression % by street

I am referring to Flop Aggression %, Turn Aggression %, and the same stat for the river.

These numbers show how aggressive players are in any given street, and how often they perform an aggressive line by betting or raising, instead of calling or checking. It’s quite a good indication of how aggressive the player is in general.

While many have reasonably high aggression stats on the flop because of an automatic c-bet, you will find plenty of opponents who play later streets passively, and this is where you can take advantage.

You can categorize various players to see when you should be barreling multiple streets or when you should check your strong hands and let your opponent dictate the action.

Many aggressive players love to bluff, so give them a chance to lose their money.

10. River call

River call efficiently shows how often your opponent is calling with weak hands.

So, whenever you see a player with river call efficiency lower than 1, you know they’re losing money when calling on the river, which is quite hard to do because of all the strong hands players have in these situations.

When you notice something like that, you can be sure they are calling way too wide, thus can value bet more often.

A final word on poker statistics

All of these poker statistics should be in your HUD (heads-up display) when playing online. When playing live, the theory behind these poker statistics should still be observed to help you make better adjustments.  

Be sure to check out some more poker articles by Tadas, such as the 10 most common mistakes in Texas Hold’em or the most common poker cheats.

After a beginner’s guide? Check out this article on poker cheat sheets.

Lead image credit: PokerTracker

Skip to:

• Standard Poker Chip Values
• Poker Chip Values in Cash Games
• Poker Chip Values in Tournaments
• Special Chip Values and Sizes
• Poker Chip Values at Major Poker Tours
• Chip Values in a Home Game
• How to Stack Poker Chips

Standard Poker Chip Values

Here’s a look at some popular poker chip values you may find in poker rooms:

• White Chips: $1
• Red Chips: $5
• Orange Chips: $10
• Green Chips: $25
• Black Chips: $100
• Purple Chips: $500
• Dark Red Chips: $1,000

There are two different types of poker chips: cash game chips and tournament chips. The above values are common in cash games.

Cash game chips have direct monetary value and can be cashed out at the cage for the exact value they display. A $25 chip is worth exactly $25, and you can walk away from the table and cash this chip in for real money at any time.

On the other hand, tournament chips don��t have any real money value and can only be used for the duration of the tournament. At the end of the tournament, all chips are taken back by the casino and players are then paid out based on their finishing positions.

Tournament chips typically have higher denominations as well.

Poker Chip Values in Cash Games

Typically speaking, chips that can be used on the casino floor are also used at cash game tables.

There is no universal industry standard for the value of poker chips, but many major casinos use the same poker chip color values to help players easily adjust when switching to a new venue.

These are some of the most popular poker chip color values that can be found at cash game tables around the world:

• Grey or White Chips: $1
• Red Chips: $5
• Orange or Blue Chips: $10
• Green Chips: $25
• Black Chips: $100
• Purple Chips: $500
• Dark Red, Yellow or Orange Chips: $1,000
• Red-White-Blue Chips: $5,000
• Red-Blue Chips: $25,000
• Grey-Orange Chips: $100,000

Red, green, and black chips are staples of the poker world and are found in nearly every poker venue. The red poker chip value is $5, the green poker chip value is $25, and the black poker chip value is $100.

Chips with values of over $1,000 are less common, but the Red-While-Blue $5k chips offered by the popular Aria Poker Room in Las Vegas are the chosen currency of many high rollers.

Poker Chip Values in Tournaments

Tournament poker chips can come in varying denominations depending on the venue you’re playing at. Plus, different poker tours around the world usually have sets of chips designed specifically for that tour.

For these reasons, it’s particularly difficult to explain poker chip values in tournaments in a universal way. Our advice is to examine the chips carefully before you start playing.

Tournament chips universally display the chip value in the middle of the chip. This allows you to figure out what every chip is worth without having to ask the dealers or other players.

Remember, when you see a new chip introduced into play, find out what the chip is worth, even if you don��t have any for the time being. You don��t want to end up calling a big bet accidentally.

While poker chips are different at every venue, here’s a good example of how poker chip values are represented with different colors at the European Poker Tour (EPT):

• Green Chips: 25
• Black Chips: 100
• Purple Chips: 500
• Red Chips: 1,000
• Yellow Chips: 5,000
• Blue Chips: 10,000
• Grey Chips: 25,000
• Pink Chips: 50,000

Color-Up in Tournament Poker

An essential part of any poker tournament, especially one with a big playing field, is the color-up or chip-up process. This is where the tournament staff introduces bigger chips into play as the blinds go up.

For example, if you look at any big field tournament, you’ll see that players start with some small denomination chips in their stacks, including 25 chip and 100 chip values.

These poker chip values become obsolete once blinds go to 1k/2k and above, increasing in increments of 500 or 1,000.

For that reason, tournament staff will go through the chip-up process, exchanging players�� small denomination chips for higher denomination chips. This doesn’t influence the overall value of each stack.

Color-Up Example:

• You find yourself with 30 chips worth 100 at the 1k/2k level.
• The floorman takes your 30 chips and hands you three chips worth 1,000 each.
• You will still have 3,000 in chips, but 27 less physical chips to have to stack.

The chip-up process is most commonly used to remove the 25 and 100 poker chip values from play, but the 500 chips, 1,000 chips, and higher denomination chips are removed in some events.

The biggest events, like the WSOP Main Event, eventually use chips worth 1,000,000 and 5,000,000, forcing multiple chip-ups throughout the tournament.

Special Chip Values and Sizes

The difference between most poker chips at a single venue will be in the color and the number displayed on the chip. But on rare occasions, you’ll notice that very special chips are introduced, which also have a different size or shape.

Oversized circular poker chips are sometimes introduced at later levels of play in poker tournaments to help ensure that the players know exactly how many ��big chips�� each player has.

While common poker etiquette suggests players should stack their chips by color and in stacks of 20, 30, or 40, some players don��t adhere to this. Players may even shuffle their big chips in with smaller chips for deception purposes.

Oversized circular chips in a new color are introduced to ensure that such deception cannot occur.

In many cash game venues, oversized chips of a rectangular shape are also offered for similar reasons. Although this is mainly to ensure that the player does not put these into the pot unintentionally.

For instance, large $25,000 chips are used in some high-stakes games. These chips have a rectangular shape and are called plaques. Larger plaques worth $100,000 or more are used in some games as well.

Poker plaques and oversized chips can also be used in poker tournaments to represent bounties in KO events, as well as in cash games to represent time bank chips.

Poker Chip Values at Major Poker Tours

As we mentioned, all major poker tours have unique sets of poker chips that they use across all of their events.

WSOP, WPT, and EPT use such chip sets in order to ensure their regulars get accustomed to the poker chip values throughout the tour.

We’ve already shown you the poker chip values for EPT, so let��s check out how chips look at two more of the world��s most popular poker tours.

World Series of Poker Chip Values

The World Series of Poker (WSOP) is the biggest poker festival in the world. Its Main Event is still considered the true World Championship event.

The festival includes over 100 events every summer, along with some extra events in Europe and the Caribbean. One of the things all these events share are the poker chips and their colors and denominations.

Here’s a look at the most common poker chip colors you will find at WSOP and their value:

• Green WSOP Chips: 25
• Black WSOP Chips: 100
• Light Blue WSOP Chips: 500
• Yellow WSOP Chips: 1,000
• Orange WSOP Chips: 5,000
• Dark Green WSOP Chips: 25,000
• Lavender WSOP Chips: 100,000
• Beige WSOP Chips: 250,000
• Oversized Red WSOP Chips: 500,000
• Oversized Yellow WSOP Chips: 1,000,000
• Oversized Purple WSOP Chips: 5,000,000

World Poker Tour Chip Values

The World Poker Tour (WPT) is another one of the most popular tours. It features events on every continent and all year round.

WPT events are offered at different buy-in levels, but the poker chip values don��t change between these different events.

Here’s a quick look at the chips you will most commonly find at WPT tables and their colors and values:

• Black WPT Chips: 100
• Red WPT Chips: 500
• Yellow WPT Chips: 1,000
• Blue WPT Chips: 5,000
• Green WPT Chips: 25,000

Working Out Chip Values in a Home Game

To run a home game, you first need to figure out how to assign the correct number of each chip to each player.

If you’re running a private home game, you’ll need to have the stacks ready to go before the game starts.

Example 1:

Here’s a quick example of how you could set up the starting $200 stacks for a $1/2 cash game (the format most commonly played in home games):

Chip Color	Chip Value	Number of Chips
Grey	$1	20 ($20)
Red	$5	16 ($80)
Green	$25	4 ($100)

As the game starts, each player will have enough small chips to post the blinds, while half of their stack will be sitting in those four green chips with a higher value.

As the stacks get deeper, you can issue rebuys in black $100 chips or green $25 chips, while the dealer can exchange $5 chips for $1 chips as needed.

Example 2:

Here’s an example of how you can set up the chip stack for a deep-stacked $2/5 cash game with 250 starting blinds ($1,250 per player):

Chip Color	Chip Value	Number of Chips
Grey	$1	5 ($)
Red	$5	49 ($245)
Green	$25	20 ($500)
Black	$100	5 ($500)

In this example, we’re using only a few $1 chips since those will only be used to pay for the small blind. Note that the dealer will break up the $5 chips as the game goes on in order to take a rake if the game is raked.

As for the bigger chips, you want to have a lot of red and green chips in play since those will be used for most of the betting. The black chips can be added to the game as players purchase rebuys.

This is all fairly simple. The real complication comes when you try to run a tournament in a home game, especially if you don��t have appropriate tournament chips.

Whatever the denominations on the chips may be, you can quite easily turn cash game chips into tournament chips by assigning them a certain value.

Example 3:

If you want to run a home game poker tournament with 10,000 starting chips and starting blinds of 25/50, here is how you could distribute the poker chip values at the start:

Chip Color	Chip Value	Number of Chips
Green	25	20 (500)
Black	100	20 (2,000)
Blue	500	3 (1,500)
Yellow	1,000	6 (6,000)

Again, the exact poker chip value you assign to each chip is totally up to you, but if you already have chips with certain denominations on them, using them to represent those exact denominations is the best way to go.

If you’re planning to run poker tournaments on a regular basis, the above table is the best way to start. We’d also recommend purchasing a set of dedicated tournament chips with 25, 100, 500, 1,000, and possibly 5,000 denominations.

How to Stack Poker Chips

If you want to be taken seriously in live poker circles, you need to learn how to stack, shuffle, and riffle your chips. While these techniques are not a part of any poker strategy, they are useful tricks that will earn you some respect from your peers.

That said, many serious players purposefully stack their chips in silly ways and act like they don��t know how to riffle their chips to present themselves as less experienced than they really are.

In either case, stacking your chips properly is a part of poker etiquette. You should always stack your chips in even stacks of 10, 20, 30, 40, or 50 chips per stack. Keep doing this throughout the game.

Other players will know how to read those stacks and quickly count out your chip stack without having to ask you how much you have. This helps speed things along, especially in tournaments where the blinds escalate.

Check out our poker articles for more tips.

Poker Chip Values FAQs

How much are poker chips worth?

While tournament poker chips don��t have any real money value, cash game chips can be converted into real money at face value. The number displayed on a cash game chip typically represents the dollar value of that particular chip.

What color poker chip usually has the highest value?

In many casinos, the $500 purple chips are the highest value chips, while many other casinos have significantly higher denominations on offer. At this time, the $100k Grey-Orange, $25k Red-Blue, and $5k Red-While-Blue chips spread by the Aria Poker Room are among the highest valued cash game chips.

What color poker chip usually has the lowest value?

In most poker rooms, $1 chips are the lowest valued chips. They typically come in white or grey.

How many chips do you start with in poker?

The number of chips you receive at the start of a poker game differs significantly between different games and venues. In cash games, you may receive as few as one chip to start with, which has a higher monetary value and can be broken up into smaller chips. In poker tournaments, you will typically start with about 50 chips of different values.

How do you assign poker chip values?

In a casino or poker room, the poker chip values will be displayed on the chips. In home games, it’s up to the organizers to decide on chip color value (see above).

Can you play poker without chips?

Yes! While chips are typically used as currency in live poker games, you can use other currencies, such as cash, to represent value at a poker table.

Lead Image: World Poker Tour/Flickr, CC BY-ND 2.0

So today I’ll cover some of the top skills you can learn by playing poker and how they can improve your life both personally and professionally.

1. Managing Your Finances

Your bankroll is your single most important asset in poker, so being able to manage your money is vital if you want to succeed in the long run.

Poor bankroll management, playing higher than you can afford, or taking too many shots are the fastest ways to lose all your money.

This is a lesson many poker players have to learn on their own before realizing there��s simply no way around it.

On the bright side, learning to handle your bankroll in poker will help you prepare for other life situations.

You will learn key aspects of planning and distributing funds in the most efficient way, and even taking necessary risks. Whether in business or on a personal level, this is a very good skill to have.

2. Making Decisions Under Pressure

When playing poker, you��re under constant pressure as almost every decision you make can have significant future consequences.

Sometimes you��ll have to play several really tough hands in a row, and you��ll need to make your best decisions every single time. You can��t take a timeout, skip, or get help from a friend.

Although it can be hard and draining, with practice you’ll learn how to deal with high-pressure situations both in poker and other areas of your life. It will become second nature.

This is why many poker players move to industries like finance and investments after they retire. They become so used to dealing with constant pressure that they��re well suited to this sort of career.

3. Patience

Anyone who has played poker for a while has learned to be patient.

You��ll often have to sit around for long periods of time doing virtually nothing but folding and waiting for good cards or a good situation to appear.

Once you learn how to be patient at the tables, you��ll definitely be better equipped to apply it in other life situations.

Even if it��s just standing in line or waiting for a check, you��ll save yourself from unnecessary frustration about things you can��t change.

While everybody around you will be on edge, you��ll be standing there calmly, simply waiting your turn �C because what else can you do?

4. Dealing With Any Situation

If there is one thing you will surely encounter when playing poker, it��s losing.

If you��re a good player, you won��t lose in the long run, but every player will have many, many losing sessions. That��s just the nature of the game.

And when you sit through countless losing sessions and keep playing at your best, you learn to keep your concentration and focus on things that matter instead of losing your temper.

This can be tough at first.

When bad sessions come one after another, it can knock your confidence – and your bankroll. It will make you feel powerless and you might even question your poker playing abilities.

But, if and when you get over these feelings, you’ll come out on the other side much stronger.

Most people don��t have to deal with this daily, so when they have to face a loss of any kind, they are likely to overreact.

You, on the other hand, will be much better equipped to deal with tough situations as they inevitably occur in your life.

5. Reading And Understanding People

Poker requires you to understand your opponents, their motivation, and their reasoning.

I��m not talking about making movie-like reads where you make a call based on the fact they raised their left eyebrow.

Rather, you��ll constantly be in a position to assess other players and think about their actions.

After a while, you��ll become much better at understanding people and their motivations, and not just at the tables.

Poker certainly does a good job of imitating life in certain aspects, and it will teach you to recognize emotions such as fear, anxiety, excitement, and more in others.

Being able to recognize these emotions is a valuable skill to have in your personal life and it can also be an asset in business, when you have to decide on someone you don��t know that well.

6. Making The Most Of The Hand You Are Dealt

There’s an expression you��re probably aware of: ��Play the hand you are dealt.��

In life, just like in poker, sometimes you have to make the most out of a bad situation, and you don��t get to change your hand at will.

Unlike most people who never played the game, you will learn full well what this means.

Sometimes at the tables, you won��t get that big hand you��re waiting for and you��ll be forced to find the best possible scenario with a mediocre holding and go with it.

While not ideal, it certainly beats sitting around as your stack turns into nothing as blinds and antes go up, and you keep folding your way into oblivion.

This skill of taking charge of things and making your stand will help you in many life situations.

Instead of accepting things are bad and can��t be changed, you��ll be looking for ways to make the best of bad situations, be it on a professional or personal level.

7. Understanding Risk vs. Reward

Poker will teach you what you need to know about the risk vs. reward principle.

While you may have heard the saying that ��tight is right�� countless times, the fact of the matter is that you need to take calculated risks to make money at the tables.

Whether it��s in a cash game where you put real money on the line, or in a tournament where you��re trying to climb the pay ladder, almost every single decision you make has certain financial consequences.

Understanding and developing this skill is invaluable in business.

Instead of being reluctant to take any risks, or blindly jumping to an unknown situation, you will learn to calculate your possible rewards.

Poker will teach you how to assess such situations and make them as profitable as you possibly can.

8. Learning To Be More Assertive

Depending on your character, you may or may not be aggressive enough in your life.

I��m not talking about physical aggression, of course, but rather the type of aggression that is sometimes required to get you where you want to go.

For example, in business negotiations, you��ll sometimes need to be aggressive and push for what you want if you feel you can get it.

If this doesn��t come naturally to you, poker is a great environment where you can learn how to be more aggressive when needed.

Pulling a well-timed bluff or going for a bit of extra value where you feel your opponent is reluctant to fold will give you the kind of edge you want to have at the tables.

These skills translate very well to real life.

Next time you��re in a situation where you need to make that extra push, you��ll be ready for it.

You��ll be able to assess the situation correctly and do the right thing instead of backing off with the fear of losing what��s already on the table.

9. Improving Your Focus

With all the mobile phones, tablets, TV screens, and everything else all around us, it��s hard to stay focused on any single activity in this world of distractions.

Poker can be a great training field for your focus.

Most players tend to zone out when not involved in a hand and do something else while waiting for the new deal.

If you want to excel, though, you shouldn��t be one of those players. Instead, stay focused on what��s going on at all times.

Even if you��re not involved in a hand, you can pick up on a valuable piece of information from a hand developing between other players, which could come in handy later down the line when you do get involved in a pot with a particular opponent.

Learning how to keep your focus at the tables will translate well into other life situations. It will teach you to ignore distractions and be present.

It will take some time, practice, and effort, but developing this skill is almost guaranteed to make you much better at anything.

Improve Your Poker Game, Improve Your Life

Poker involves so many strategic, mathematical, and psychological elements, all of which require a great deal of skill.

If you take it seriously, the game will challenge you on many levels and will require constant growth and development if you want to succeed.

This is what makes poker so hard in the first place, but it��s also what makes it one of the most valuable and useful games to learn. It gives you skills that you can take into other personal and professional situations.

You don��t even have to become a professional poker player to take advantage of the game.

Even if you play casually but think about your decisions and work on improving, you��ll develop many of the skills discussed in this article.

So, on top of having a lot of fun when playing, you also reap other benefits that will help you succeed in your day-to-day life.

Casinos across the world invest a lot of time, money, and effort into security and generally manage to keep things safe and secure but, sometimes, things happen that not even the casino security team could have seen coming.

In this article, we��ll look at some of the biggest casino and poker room cheating scandals from recent years.

1. Counterfeit Chips at Borgata Winter Open

Security scandals are usually connected to casino games, which makes the Borgata story that much more interesting.

Back in 2014, a poker player named Christian Lusardi was arrested for introducing counterfeit chips into a Borgata Winter Open tournament.

According to the reports, Lusardi used the fake chips to top up his stack in the festival’s first event, which had $372,000 reserved for the winner.

Not surprisingly, he came in to the second day of the tournament as the chip leader.

However, Lusardi��s trickery was short-lived. Tournament officials quickly detected the surplus of chips and started an investigation while the event was still ongoing.

In full panic mode, Lusardi tried to get rid of the counterfeits by chucking them down the toilet. Naturally, this clogged the pipes, and it wasn��t long before the cause was traced back to Lusardi��s room.

Investigators found $2.7 million worth of chips in the pipes.

Fake chips were of 5,000 denominations and the tournament had to be stopped.

Lusardi was arrested shortly after at another hotel nearby, and he confessed to introducing $800,000 worth of fake chips into the event.

Lusardi was later charged with a different crime and consequently sentenced to five years in prison, and it seems he��ll never face the trial for the Borgata scandal.

2. An Inside Scheme That Cost Bellagio Over $1 million

Bellagio is one of the most iconic Las Vegas casinos and is loved by all types of players, from small stakes casuals to high rollers.

The venue employs some of the best security experts around, but even with all these measures in place, they fell victim to an elaborate scam back in 2016.

This particular scam was an inside job as it involved a craps dealer, Marc William Branco, and two of his friends.

The scam itself was quite simple. Branco��s accomplices would come to the table handled by their friend and announce high-value (hop) bets on particular roll combinations.

However, they did it in such a way that it was impossible to discern what their bet actually was. They would just mumble something that sounded like they were placing a hop bet.

When the roll was over, Branco would pay them as if that were the bet they announced regardless of what numbers fell.

This kept on happening for over two years.

The casino finally caught on after the duo took them for more than a million, guessing correctly in 76 instances over this period. The odds of this happening are 452 billion to 1, so alarm bells were ringing.

The trio was eventually charged with several crimes, and they each got at least four years in prison while also having to pay hundreds of thousands in restitution to the casino.

If they knew how to walk away while ahead, perhaps their scam would have never been uncovered.

3. A Video Poker Bug That Lost Casinos Hundreds of Thousands

Security flaws aren’t always specific to a location. Sometimes they can be tied to a particular game, especially if it’s electronic.

This is exactly what happened with Game King video poker machines, which featured a hard-to-find but fatal flaw �C in all its machines across casinos in the US.

It was John Kane who discovered this bug in 2009 and shared it with his friend Andre Nestor. Together, the two took casinos for well over $500,000.

The bug itself wasn’t easy to find, and Kane stumbled upon it by accident.

However, if anyone were to find it, it would be Kane, as he spent countless hours playing video poker in the years prior, losing a lot of money in the process.

What he stumbled upon, though, was a real game-changer.

Kane discovered that he could change the credit denomination on the game after a big win, and it would pay the jackpot based on the new denomination.

So, he could play for a royal flush on a $1 denomination and then switch it up to $10 or $20 when he made the hand for a massive payout.

It sounds simple but the process to actually do this involved switching between game variations, and for the bug to work, the machine had to have the double-up feature enabled.

But the duo figured all this out and managed to perfect their method.

Eventually, the casinos clocked on.

Kane was arrested first at the Silverton Casino in Las Vegas, and the police picked up Nestor at his home in Pennsylvania.

But, even though the investigation revealed what they were doing, the prosecutors had a very weak case against the two.

After all, they didn’t use any outside devices or tamper with the machines in any way. Their defense was they simply pressed the buttons, which was what you��re supposed to do on a video poker machine.

In the end, the case was dropped, and neither was convicted. Casinos couldn’t retrieve a majority of their losses, so you could say these two pretty much got away with it.

And, since this security flaw was present in pretty much all Game King cabinets, we can only assume that at least a few more gamblers were able to discover it and take advantage of it.

4. Mike Postle Poker Cheating Scandal

One of the biggest security scandals to rock the poker world took place in 2018 and 2019 at the Stones Gambling Hall, bringing to question the use of RFID cards and live streaming.

The main protagonist of this scandal was Mike Postle, the man who kept winning game after game, pulling in big pots and making incredible plays that left other players and commentators scratching their heads.

Games from the Stones Gambling Hall were streamed live on YouTube and other media channels, allowing viewers to watch the action as it unfolded.

To live stream the games, the organizers used cards equipped with RFID chips, allowing them to identify players�� hole cards and display them for the audience.

Over the period of time, the Stones Gambling Hall hosted many players, some regulars and some guests, and all of them had varying results, as is normal in poker.

Only Postle kept on winning, with virtually no losing sessions.

At first, some people believed that he was just running super-hot, while others thought the poker world had perhaps uncovered another great talent.

But as time passed, it became more and more obvious that something sinister was happening behind the scenes.

Eventually, Veronica Brill, who did some commentary for the live stream and had played in some games herself, came out publicly accusing Mike Postle of cheating.

She accused him of having access to the RFID data, which would allow him to know other players’ hole cards, explaining his stellar results.

What ensued could be described as one of the biggest controversies in modern poker history.

Postle, of course, denied accusations, and there was no solid evidence to back the cheating claims.

His results were way above the expectation, and his demeanor at the tables was suspicious. He’d often look down during hands as if he were trying to read something from his phone.

The poker public had a lot of fun with the latter, saying that perhaps he simply enjoyed looking at his crotch.

The case went to court, but charges were eventually dismissed. Although most players were convinced there was cheating going on, no one could find any real evidence.

It was all pretty circumstantial, at least as far as courts were concerned.

Postle had seemingly got away with it but then decided to file a defamation lawsuit against anyone and everyone who said anything bad about him, including some of the players involved in the original lawsuit, asking for millions in damages.

These suits were dismissed as frivolous, and then Veronica Brill and Todd Witteles (another player Postle went after) sued once again, this time demanding to have their legal fees covered.

With this debt amounting to over $50,000 and whatever money he might owe to his own legal team (who also abandoned him in the process), it seemed Postle was on the verge of financial ruin and inches away from involuntary bankruptcy.

A ��confidential settlement was reached�� in December 2021, finally putting an end to the whole legal saga.

5. Casino Security Expert Cheated Slot Machine Code

Casinos, game developers, and various control boards go above and beyond to ensure all games found on casino floors are safe and cheater-proof.

But what happens when one of the people in charge of making things secure goes rogue?

As you could well imagine, this can be a real nightmare for the casinos.

Ronald Dale Harris was an employee of the Nevada Gaming Control Board, the state��s supervisory body for all things gambling.

He was a computer expert whose job was to write anti-cheating software for slot machines during the early 1990s.

It appears that Harris was a pretty good programmer, as he managed to change the source code of some slot machines without anyone noticing.

? 12 Sneaky Ways To Cheat At Slots

With these changes, slots were primed to pay huge wins after a player would insert coins into them following a very specific sequence.

Once slots were shipped out, he shared this secret with several accomplices, who then proceeded to win hundreds of thousands of dollars from Las Vegas Casinos between 1993-95.

In the end, Harris was arrested and sentenced to seven years in prison, but only because one of his accomplices ratted him out to the police when he was caught cheating in a game of keno in Atlantic City.

In addition to serving prison time, Harris also made it to the infamous ��black book�� which means he��s barred from entering any casinos in Las Vegas.

A Game Of Cat And Mouse

These primarily read as entertaining stories, but they can also be observed as cautionary tales, as you should never let your guard down when in a casino and must always stay alert.

There will always be someone looking to cheat their way into easy money, and you can��t always trust the casino security to save you from trouble.

As we��ve seen in this article, no matter how hard people in the gaming industry work to try and protect themselves, even the biggest casinos and the best-organized events can become victims of cheaters.

The battle between swindlers and security staff is always ongoing and probably will never end.

But, at the very least, we��ll get some good stories out of it!

Lead image: Shutterstock

As a result, there’s a fairly large grey zone where the rules aren��t quite clear enough, opening up space for a practice known as “angle shooting” where people bend the rules for their advantage.

In this article, we’ll cover what angle shooting means in poker, some of the more common angle shoots, and how to protect yourself at the tables.

What Is Angle Shooting?

Angle shooting in poker is when someone does things that are questionable or unethical – but not strictly against the rules – to try and get an edge over another player.

While the practice is generally frowned upon by the community, there are plenty of players who��ll take their chances walking the fine edge between what is and isn��t allowed.

Why Is Angle Shooting Bad?

As mentioned, there is a fair number of players who don��t see anything wrong with angle shooting.

Their reasoning is that if they aren��t breaking the rules, it’s no big deal.

The problem with this line of thinking is that poker is a game of people.

Just because something isn’t technically breaking the rules, it doesn��t mean it��s acceptable.

In every specific life setting, there is usually a set of unwritten rules that you are expected to follow. The same goes for poker etiquette.

And poor poker etiquette for the sake of gaining a small, short-term edge won��t win you any popularity points.

Angle shooters usually aren��t looked upon kindly, and other players will try to avoid them as much as possible.

In fact, it can even prevent you from getting into some of the best games if you get a reputation for it.

This is because angle shooting can create a toxic environment where recreational players, who are crucial for the games to run, refuse to sit down and would rather spend their time and money doing something else.

It negatively impacts everyone, including persistent angle shooters, who have no one to blame but themselves.

5 Common Angle Shoots To Look Out For

Although most of the poker community play by the rules, there will always be some players who try to cut corners and take advantage of unsuspecting victims.

So be prepared by getting to know some of the most common angle shoots in poker.

1. Going South

“Going south” is when someone secretly removes chips from the table during a live cash game.

? 57 Poker Terms And Slang Phrases You Need To Know

For example, a player wins a big $2,000 pot playing $1/$2, and they decide they don��t want to risk it all in later hands.

So, they remove a few hundred from the table when no one is looking.

In most poker rooms, this isn��t allowed, but penalties for going south are usually quite mild.

Another problem is that it��s hard to prove if you don��t notice it immediately.

This is one of the most common angle shoots you��ll encounter when playing live cash games as there are players out there who do it routinely.

The reason why this practice is frowned upon is that all chips that are at the table should be in play at all times, unless a player decides to get up and leave.

Sadly, calling someone out for going south can cause a lot of tension at the table and lead to some unpleasant situations.

That��s why many players decide to let it go and allow others to get away with it to keep the game going and avoid any drama.

2. Intentionally Hiding Big Denomination Chips

Another fairly common practice both in tournaments and cash games involves hiding big denomination chips behind the lower-value stacks.

By doing this, the angle shooter fools their opponents into believing they have fewer chips than they actually have, which can significantly impact someone��s strategy.

For example, you find yourself in a hand against someone you believe only has 15 big blinds.

You flop a top pair with a decent kicker, and when they bet into you, you decide to put them all in.

It��s only after they make the call that you see with horror the full stack of big chips sliding from behind.

Unfortunately, there isn��t much you can do at this point.

While the other player was supposed to keep their big denomination chips in the clear view, the usual punishment for this is a slap on the wrist for them (maybe a few hands away from the table in a tournament and pretty much nothing in a cash game).

It��s one of the reasons you��ll hear experienced players often ask someone how much they have left.

It may be annoying at times, but it helps avoid these things from happening.

When something like this happens to you in a big tournament, and ends up being the reason you bust, it really feels bad.

So, be sure to protect yourself, especially against players you know have done this in the past.

3. Pump Fake

In poker, information is gold, and obtaining the relevant information during a hand isn��t always easy.

So, some players will go to extra lengths to try and gauge a reaction from their opponent – including bending the rules.

The pump fake is one of the most common moves from this category.

This is when the angle shooter will pick up a stack of chips and move them forward while holding them in their hand, seemingly announcing a bet or a raise.

However, at the last moment, they��ll pull the stack back and put it down with the rest of their chips.

This move is treated differently at different venues.

At some places, you can��t get away with this kind of behavior, as any forward motion with your chips will be binding.

However, some casinos and poker rooms aren��t as strict and won��t force the player to stick to their action.

The main goal of this move is to try and gauge a reaction.

Lesser experienced players may even go ahead and fold their hands immediately when they see the big stack of chips in the opponent��s hand, which gives the angle shooter a massive advantage.

If they don��t get the desired result with their pump fake, they��ll take the bet back and reconsider.

Most casinos won��t let someone get away with this repeatedly.

So if you find yourself at a table where someone is doing this over and over again, make sure to complain to the floor.

Even if there isn��t a specific rule to address the issue, they��ll usually talk to the player and warn them that if they do it again, their action will stand.

4. Mis-Declaring A Hand At A Showdown

Once all the bets are in and there is no action left, it��s time for cards to speak.

However, some players like to do the actual speaking before letting their cards do it, and they do it to get you to muck your hand.

Say your opponent bets, you call, and they announce a ��full house.��

Even before they turn their hand, you throw your cards into the muck, only to see them turn over Ace-high.

You��re in shock that someone would lie so blatantly at a poker table, but this isn��t all that uncommon.

If you call the floor, they can always say they were just joking.

Again, they might get a notice, while you may be out of a huge pot and a lot of money.

If a player was honestly just messing about, they might let you retrieve your hand or just straight up give you the pot. But don��t count on it.

Even if such behavior is bad, it��s your responsibility to protect yourself against it as much as humanly possible.

To protect yourself from this particular type of ��cheating,�� you should never release your hand until all cards are face up.

If you��re first to show, table your hand unless you��re certain you can��t win.

Don��t believe what anyone tells you, unless it��s someone you��ve known for years and you can be certain they��d never pull such trick on you.

Someone repeatedly miss-declaring their hand at a showdown will probably run into problems, but they don��t need to do it all the time.

If they pull it off in one big pot, it��s already given them a huge advantage.

It��s up to you to take matters into your own hands here; don��t count on anyone else to protect you.

5. Acting Out of Turn

This is another move aimed at getting extra information.

For example, a player may bet, and while you��re pondering what to do, you hear an angle shooter announce a call or a raise.

This sneaky trick is designed to confuse you into making a wrong decision.

Of all angle shoots out there, this is the least elaborate and least effective one.

It only works if they succeed in their intentions of confusing you.

Otherwise, they��ve just given you an extra piece of information you can work with.

For example, in most poker rooms verbal actions are binding, even if they act out of turn and the action before them doesn��t change.

So if one player bets and you hear someone declaring a raise behind you while you��re sitting there with a strong hand, you can just make a call.

Now, the player who acted out of turn will be forced to raise, and when the action gets back to you, you can spring your trap.

What I will say is that you shouldn��t feel bad about the poor guy acting out of turn when you��re sitting there with a monster.

Often, they’re doing it deliberately, not by accident, so let them have a taste of their own medicine.

Being a nice guy at the table is completely fine, but don��t let others take advantage of you.

Keep Yourself Safe From Poker Angle Shooters

There will always be some degree of angle shooting involved in poker.

With a game that revolves around outsmarting your opponents, this is pretty much inevitable.

Some behaviors are acceptable and tolerated, while others, like the ones described in this article, should be avoided at all costs.

If you spend a fair bit of time playing poker, especially in the live setting, you��re bound to run into all sorts of situations.

Hopefully, with this guide, you��ll be better prepared to handle them and avoid being taken advantage of at the tables.

And as we all know from the infamous Phil Ivey case, casinos don’t take kindly to players using the technique.

But what is it and how does it work?

Keep reading to understand more about edge sorting and what went down with Phil Ivey.

What Is Edge Sorting?

Edge sorting is an advantage play technique used mostly in baccarat, where players make use of imperfections on the backs of cards to help identify specific ones, giving them an edge over the casino.

Edge sorting requires a defective decks of cards �C cards with slightly different patterns or cuts �C and some seriously impressive vision.

The playing cards seem perfectly normal at first glance, but the patterns on their backs aren��t symmetrical.

While many decks have a standard image and border on the back, many use a series of circles or diamonds instead.

When the cards are cut, they aren’t 100% symmetrical, with one side of the card showing the full circle or diamond, while the other shows half of the shape.

Just seeing this difference in pattern doesn’t do anything, though, so you need to do the ‘sorting’ part.

When one card is rotated 180 degrees, two cards can be distinguished from one another.

As you can��t be sorting through cards in the casino, this needs to be done with a keen eye or by making use of clever requests and techniques to make it happen.

How Edge Sorting Works

Someone looking to take advantage of this defect firstly needs to find a casino where defective cards are being used.

While most manufacturers try their best to avoid such mistakes, it does happen.

So, once the player knows about the typical make of card decks with this defect and they find a casino using them (or convince the casino to use these decks), they can set their plan in motion.

This technique works very well for punto banco (variation of baccarat), the game where you gain a big advantage if you can identify big (face) cards from regular ones.

During the course of the game, the player will ask the dealer to rotate face cards.

They can do this under a guise of superstition, and if the dealer is unaware of what��s going on, they��ll usually indulge the player, especially if the request comes from a high roller.

Once the shoe is out, all cards will be positioned just right. High cards will be rotated one way, and low cards will be rotated the other way.

So, when the deal begins again, the player will be able to distinguish between low (especially 6s through 9s) and high cards and place their bets on the more favorable side.

For this strategy to work, it’s also essential that the casino uses an automatic card shuffler as the machine will not rotate cards during the shuffle.

If this process were done manually by the dealer, the entire setup would be spoiled, and the player would get no advantage.

Is Edge Sorting Illegal?

Although the lines are blurred around whether it��s a form of cheating, edge sorting isn��t illegal.

Most laws stipulate that cheating has to involve some sort of interference with the game.

With edge sorting, players aren��t using any special tools or even physically touching the cards, so there are no elements of cheating as such.

However, while it��s very unlikely for someone to be prosecuted for doing this, they are equally unlikely to get their money if the casino catches on to them �C and it seems that most courts side with the casinos on that particular matter.

How Phil Ivey Used Edge Sorting

Edge sorting became well known back in 2012 when Phil Ivey was accused of using it during high stakes baccarat sessions in Atlantic City and London.

During four visits to the Borgata Hotel Casino & Spa in New Jersey he pulled in about $9.6 million, and followed that with a four-day baccarat binge at Crockfords in London where he made nearly $10 million.

When the casinos investigated these huge wins, they claimed he cheated. Ivey admitted to using edge sorting but claimed it was legitimate.

So how did he do it?

Namely, in 2012, Ivey took Crockfords for ��7.7 million ($9.6 million) playing high stakes baccarat.

The casino was suspicious and refused to pay out, giving Ivey only his ��1 million deposit back.

It later came to light that the high roller and his accomplice, Cheung Yin Sun, used edge sorting during their sessions.

They��d asked for a specific brand of playing cards with a distinct white-circle pattern on the back.

They asked to use a shuffling machine and, once completing the shoe, they asked to keep using the same decks.

Their strangest request?

In the first round of games, they had the dealer rotate all the 7s through 9s, the most valuable cards in baccarat, as they first came out of the shoe.

As mentioned already, casinos often indulge the superstitions and good-luck rituals gamblers request.

Considering how much Ivey was wagering per hand, of course they wanted to keep him at the table and didn’t mind abiding by his strange quirks.

Ivey decided to take them to court asking for his winnings to be paid in full.

He never once tried to deny they were using edge sorting �C he simply saw nothing wrong with it as it wasn��t cheating.

UK courts didn��t see it that way, though.

Although they didn��t say Ivey was cheating, they all agreed that he had no proper claim to the money.

They concluded he was purposefully dishonest, asking the dealer to rotate cards under false pretenses (claiming he was superstitious), which interfered with the regular flow of the game.

Ivey not getting paid his winnings sucked for the high roller, but it wasn��t as bad as the suit from Borgata Casino that emerged soon after the edge sorting story hit the headlines.

After getting wind of what happened in the UK, the Atlantic City Casino filed suit against Ivey, asking for $9.6 million back – the amount Ivey won playing punto banco at Borgata between April and October 2012.

The ball was on the other side of the court in this case as Ivey had already been paid his money and Borgata was trying to get it back.

Of course, Ivey wasn��t going to go down without a fight, and a long legal battle ensued.

In 2018, the battle came to an official end, as the court decided Borgata was in the right and gave the casino the green light to go after Ivey��s assets.

This wasn��t something that came as a huge surprise and Ivey was clearly ready for it, as Borgata found the zero balance in his New Jersey account after the court ruling allowed them to go after his money.

However, they did manage to get some of it back thanks to his performance at the 2019 World Series of Poker, where Ivey had his $124,410 in winnings seized by the Borgata Casino.

He��s one of the richest poker players in the world, although it��s presumed his cash is not located in US banks.

??Find out why Casino.org��s scams and cheating expert, R.Paul Wilson, doesn��t believe Ivey should have been punished for cheating.

Remember: The House Always Wins

While different variations of edge sorting may have been around for a while, it wasn��t until relatively recently that the technique became known to the general public, primarily because of Ivey��s high profile case.

This will probably force card manufacturers to pay much more attention to their production process and avoid these types of errors in the future.

The public opinion remains somewhat divided on the topic.

While some believe there is nothing wrong with edge sorting and is the casino��s fault, others think that cheating is cheating, no matter how you try to wrap it.

At the end of the day, it turns out that you really can��t beat the casino in their own game.

Even if you find an edge, they��ll likely find a way to get their money back one way or another.

Of course, this has never stopped people from trying, and they��ll continue to try in the future, no matter how unfavorable the odds may seem.

Knowing it won’t make you a better player but at least you’ll be able to understand what others are talking about and will enjoy the game more as a result.

A

ABC Poker

A basic and predictable strategy where you only play and bet strong hands, and fold everything else. Also known as playing by the book.

Airball

��Airball�� or ��airballing�� is when a player is bluffing with complete ��air,�� meaning no actual hand and no realistic chance of improving.

American Airlines

A common name for pocket aces that comes from the hand��s abbreviation of ��AA.��

Being the strongest hand in Texas Hold��em, pocket aces have several other nicknames, another common one being ��pocket rockets.��

Ammo (Ammunition)

Refers to a player��s chip stack. When you��re out of ammo, it means you no longer have chips.

You��ll find that a number of poker slang terms have been borrowed from the military.

Angle Shooting

When a player intentionally tries to take advantage of others using tactics that aren’t against the rules but are considered unethical.

You��ll usually find this term in the phrase ��shooting an angle.�� An example would be a player who hides their big chip denominations or falsely announces their hand at a showdown.

? How To Avoid Angle Shooters In Poker

Arsenal

Describes a player’s skills and plays.

Someone with a big arsenal is capable of pulling different plays at different times to throw their opponents off and take maximum advantage of a situation.

The better you know and understand all strategy nuances and various moves, the more arsenal you have at the table.

B

Belly Buster

A common term for a gunshot, also known as “inside straight draw.”

Refers to thee kind of straight draw where only four cards in the deck can be used to fill the gap and give the player a made straight.

For example, if you have 98 on A65, you have a belly buster because only one out of four 7s can make your straight.

Big Blind Special

When the player in the big blind wins the pot or makes a strong hand, usually because they were able to see the flop for free.

If you��re a fan of poker shows, you��ll probably have heard this phrase quite often.

Big Slick

Refers to Ace-King of any suit – the hand you definitely want to play.

AK also has tons of popular names starting with the initials, such as Anna Kournikova, Korean Airlines, or AK-47 to name a few.

Bloodbath

Sometimes used by poker commentators to describe a situation where two or more players are about to get involved in a huge pot.

This is usually a scenario where all involved players have a big hand or a big draw, so it��s quite likely all chips will go into the middle, resulting in several players being eliminated from the tournament or having their stacks decimated.

Brick

Used to describe a card that doesn’t complete any possible draws and is of no relevance to a current hand.

Busted

Busting refers to losing all of your chips or money.

It can be used in a couple of different situations, for example, you can be busted from the tournament because you lost all of your chips.

The same could be said about cash games if you lose all the money and you can��t reload anymore.

It can also refer to a situation where a player loses their entire bankroll and has no money to play poker anymore, so they are busted.

C

Cambodia

Describes the hole cards 74o, with the suited version sometimes referred to as ��Cambodian Slick��.

The term originates from New York City cardrooms, but there��s no real explanation for where it got its name.

Cardrack

Used to describe a player who��s been getting dealt good hands for the entire session or a tournament.

A ��cardrack�� will often go on a heater, getting big pocket pairs, hitting all of their draws, and stacking many players in the process.

Chip Dumping

A practice that’s only found in poker tournaments and is when one player intentionally loses to another player to transfer chips from one stack to another.

Players can chip dump for a variety of reasons, but the most common scenario is when two players are colluding in a tournament and one of them accumulates a big stack, allowing them to ��share�� some of their wealth.

Chip dumping is against the rules and can lead to a tournament suspension or even money confiscation if players get caught doing it.

? The Most Common Poker Cheats And How To Avoid Them

Clicking Buttons

Used to describe actions that don��t make sense and are done just for the sake of doing something, mostly referring to players who don��t understand what they��re doing.

The term originated from online poker, but it��s also used in live games these days.

Computer Hand

A nickname for the starting hand Q7o.

Modern-day poker relies heavily on math and numbers. People have come up with all sorts of calculations, especially for the starting hands.

Someone worked out that the hand Q7o was the worst profitable starting hand with slightly positive equity against a random hand, which got dubbed ��computer hand.��

Cooler

Describes a situation where both players have a very strong hand and no matter how they play it, all of their money is likely to end up in the middle of the pot.

A cooler is a situation that can��t be avoided and ends up costing one of the players a lot of money.

Cowboys

A nickname for pocket kings (KK) that’s used by both players and poker commentators.

Crabs

When you��re dealt any combination of pocket threes, you��re dealt crabs.

The nickname likely originates from the fact the number three on the cards looks a bit like a sideways crab.

Credit Card Roulette

A practice used by players to determine who��ll pay the check (dinner, drinks, etc.). Everyone throws their credit card into a hat or a box, and the lucky winner gets to pay for everyone.

Although this isn��t strictly a poker term, you��ve probably heard it a few times, especially if you like to tune in for streams and podcasts of highs stakes players.

Sometimes you��ll even hear individual players complaining about running on the wrong side of variance playing credit card roulette.

D

Dolly Parton

Nickname for any starting hand combo containing a 9 and a 5.

The name originates from the famous song ��9 to 5�� performed by Dolly Parton. You might also hear it being called a ��full-time job��.

It’s less common these days and tends to be used by more seasoned players.

Donkey

Refers to someone who doesn��t know how to play well.

Although there��s no steadfast definition of a ��poker donkey�� you��ll probably know it when you see it.

Doomswitch

A term used to describe a player running poorly and on the wrong side of variance.

It originates from online poker and the theory that poker sites have a certain ��switch�� they can turn to make particular players win or lose more often.

Although most players take this as a joke, some genuinely do believe sites operate this way to stop you winning too much money.

It��s only a myth, so don��t worry.

Ducks

Pocket deuces (twos) are often referred to as ducks, thanks to the number 2’s slight resemblance to a duck.

Dirty Stack

Describes a chip stack that contains a random number of different denomination chips, all mixed together.

It��s good etiquette (and often a rule) to organize your chips properly in piles, with the larger denominations at the front for other players to see.

F

Fist Pump

A motion used to celebrate winning a pot or another positive outcome at a table.

It��s become quite common to refer to other situations as well, such as ��fist-pump shove�� – being thrilled to move all-in after your opponent bets into your monster.

G

Gappers

The term ��gapper�� is used to describe hole cards that have the potential to make straights (connectors).

The number of cards needed in the middle is the ��gap�� so if you have a hand like 5-7, you have a one-gapper (the 6 is missing).

A hand like 7-10 is a two-gapper, etc.

Gears

Describes a player��s ability to adjust to different situations and find the best play available to them on the spot.

Such a player is capable of shifting gears as required, just as if they were driving a car.

GG

An abbreviation of a good game, often used online to express gratitude for a good match.

It can also be used ironically to make fun of weaker players or when someone makes a very bad play.

Going South

When a player ��goes south�� in a poker game, it means they removed a portion of their chips from the table in order to reduce their stake.

This is against the rules in most games and can even be called an angle shoot.

All the money you win has to remain in play until you decide to get up and leave, so be sure to avoid ��going south�� – no matter what.

H

Hero

If you watch poker training videos or hand reviews, you��ll often come across the term ��hero.�� This is refers to the player whose hand is being reviewed or the one you are focusing on.

High Society

A stack of ��high society�� refers to the stack of the highest denomination chips available in the casino.

Although the term is used by gamblers in general, it was made famous in poker circles thanks to the cult movie Rounders.

Hit And Run

This is when you decide to leave the game very soon after winning a huge pot or several banks in a row.

Some players use this to protect their winnings but it��s considered unethical behavior and shouldn��t be something you practice a lot.

Horse

A player who is being backed by someone else to play in a certain tournament or a cash game.

The ��horse�� provides their skills and the backer provides part of or the full buy-in. Any profits are shared as agreed between both parties.

I

Idiot End

Refers to a straight (draw). When a player has a draw to a straight where they can only make the lowest straight possible, with one or more options for bigger straights, they are said to be drawing to the idiot end of the straight.

J

Jam

Another name for raising all-in, ��jam�� describes a situation where you put all your money in the middle of the pot.

L

Live One

Similar to a donkey, poker players use the term ��live one�� to describe a player who��s not very good at poker and is therefore an easy target at the table.

A ��live one�� usually plays a lot of hands, has a reasonably big bankroll, and doesn��t mind losing as long as they��re having fun.

Lodden Thinks

The game of ��Lodden Thinks�� was popularized by high stakes players such as Antonio Esfandiari and Phil Laak.

Although it has nothing to do with poker, it��s often used as an activity between hands.

Players will bet on what another player thinks about a certain topic.

The player who plays the part of ��Lodden�� will write down their answer, and other players will place their bets. What makes the game fun is that the answer doesn��t have to be at all true.

It��s about what other players may think, so it involves a certain degree of psychology and reading abilities.

M

Muck

��Muck�� is another name for folding.

However, mucking is mostly used to describe a situation at a showdown where your opponent shows a better hand than you, so you decide to muck (fold) without showing your holdings.

N

Nitfest

A term used to describe a game where all players are playing very tightly and cautiously.

It usually has negative connotations, as a ��nitfest�� table provides very little fun or excitement.

Nosebleeds

In the world of poker, there are low and medium stakes, there are high stakes, and then there are the nosebleeds.

The term is used to describe ultra-high stakes games where huge amounts of money are on the line all the time.

An excellent example of true nosebleeds is cash games in Macau, where winning or losing a few million dollars in a session isn��t a big deal.

Nut Nut

You��re probably familiar with the term ��the nuts�� which is used to describe the best possible poker hand in a given situation.

The term ��nut nut�� is the next level, though, as it is the hand that��s both the nuts and the one that has a chance to improve even further to even better nuts.

For example, you could have a flopped nut straight with a draw to the best possible flush. In that case, you have what poker players like to call ��nut nut.��

P

Pwned

Another term originating from the online world, ��pwned�� means pretty much the same thing as ��owned�� �C but it��s a bit more than that.

When you get ��pwned�� it means you were either severely outplayed, or the other player got super lucky.

Either way, a bulk of your chips will be moving across the table.

R

Rags

Used to describe bad and completely unplayable cards.

This means anything that has a very small chance of improving and should be instantly folded preflop, such as 92o, J3o, etc.

Another expression you might hear in the same context is ��napkins.��

Robusto

You��re probably familiar with the term ��busto��, used when a player busts out of the tournament or loses all of their money.

��Robusto�� has the opposite meaning.

It describes someone who vastly increased their poker bankroll by playing a lot or by winning a big tournament, so you’d say ��from busto to robusto.��

Runner Runner

Refers to a situation where you had to hit both cards on the turn and on the river to make your hand.

For example, you have two clubs in your hand and there’s only one club on the flop, so to make your flush, you have to hit a club on the turn and another one on the river.

Therefore you have a runner-runner flush draw.

S

Sailboats

Slang for pocket fours because the number 4 looks similar to a sail.

Set Mining

“Set mining” is when you call with a (usually small) pocket pair with the sole intention of flopping the set.

Shark

A “shark” is someone who knows the game very well and takes advantage of weaker players by punishing them for mistakes – the exact opposite of a donkey.

Most of the time, shark refers to a solid professional poker player.  

The term is often used in a broader context too, as a ��card shark�� is someone well-versed in many card games, not just poker.

Shill

A ��shill�� is a person who tries to paint a (usually false) positive picture about a specific product or company.

In the poker world, ��shill�� usually refers to forum users who go out of their way to justify certain poker rooms and their actions, giving false testimonies to try and throw other players off track.

Sleeper Straddle

A ��sleeper straddle�� is a special kind of straddle (optional blind bet made before any cards are dealt) and you won��t find it in many games.

The ��sleeper�� can be posted anywhere, at any position, and it only becomes active if there is no action before everyone folds.

Snowmen

Slang for pocket eights, as the number 8 looks like a snowman. You might also hear this hand being called ��octopussy�� and ��infinities.��

Suicide King

Slang for the King of Hearts.

If you look closely, you��ll notice this card depicts a king with a sword drawn through his heart or head (at least in most standard decks).

The term was also popularized thanks to the famous book ��The Professor, The Banker, and the Suicide King,�� which describes high stakes games that poker elites (��The Corporation��) played against the wealthy banker Andy Beal.

T

Tanking

Refers to a player who is thinking and taking time before making a decision. The name comes from “time bank.”

You��ll often see players tanking when they��re faced with a big bet on the turn or the river where their decision can have a substantial financial impact.

W

Walking Chips

When a player has a large stack of chips in a tournament and takes a break to walk around the tournament area, they have “walking chips” because they have enough to be able to take a stroll and miss a few hands.

Strategically, this isn’t a good decision.

The only time it makes sense to do this is if you are playing in a satellite (a tournament where all winners get the ticket to another event) and are guaranteed a win because of your massive stack.

But even then, sticking at your table makes sense as you never know what will come up.

Whiff

To whiff means to miss entirely on your draw. It��s just another term for missing out on the card you need.

When you call a bet from another player holding a flush draw, for example, but the turn card doesn��t help you at all, you��ve whiffed.

That being said, reading an actual book is a completely different experience, so let me share a list of the top 20 poker books for Texas Hold ��em players.

It doesn��t include some classics, like Doyle Brunson’s Super System, just because it��s not exactly a book on Hold ��em.

I also skipped some other known names that are more of a general read and concentrated on actual Texas Hold ��em books and ones that you could apply in this game.

20. Sit ��n Go Strategy �C Collin Moshman

SUMMARY: a guide to winning one table tournaments

I decided to start this list with an epic book for single table tournaments. Since there aren��t that many resources for this specific game, I think it deserves a place in the top 20.

When I started playing poker, Sit ��n�� Gos were my main game, and Collin Moshman��s book was my go-to resource for strategy-related questions.

I learned a lot from reading it, and I��m sure it can help you as well if you��re playing this format.

It starts with a clear explanation of basic concepts of the game and covers equity, pot odds, expected chip value, and more.

Then, Moshman conveniently divides strategy concepts into:

• Low blind play
• Mid blind play
• High blind play

In each of these sections, he covers how to play various hands based on the changing environment, how to adjust versus different opponents, and when to tune up your aggression. 

On top of that, he introduces specific topics like ICM strategy in the mid blinds section and bubble approach in the end game segment, which is very helpful in building your overall game plan.

The book ends with ��Sit ��n�� Go Career Play�� in which Moshman discusses various topics that are vital for long-term success.

He compares this format against others, and lists advantages and disadvantages along with plenty of actionable tips on how to choose the best games, multi-table, and build a successful career.

You will also get a lot of useful materials like pot odds charts, preflop probabilities, shoving tables for various stack depth, and other statistics.

All in all, if you are playing or want to play one table tournaments, this is a poker book worth your time.

19. Winning Poker Tournaments One Hand at a Time �C Eric Lynch

SUMMARY: expert tips for tournament players

Not the most well-known book on the list but still worth a mention.

Being a solid winner himself, Eric Lynch knows a thing or two about tournaments.

As you can guess from the name, this book��s about tournament strategy and all nuances that come in this format.

I like that the author shares in-depth analyses of various spots to help you understand even more advanced topics.

To mention a few:

• Adjustments in a deep-stack and short-stack situations
• Differences in multiway and heads-up pots
• C-betting strategies for various areas
• Bluffing and bluff catching

With plenty of real hand examples, this book will give you a solid understanding of tournament poker and a ton of actionable tips you can take to the tables.

18. Harrington on Hold ’em Expert Strategy for No Limit Tournaments �C Dan Harrington

SUMMARY: how to adjust your strategy in tournaments

Dan Harrington is probably one of the most famous poker authors and has book series for both cash games and tournaments, so there is no way we could exclude him from this list.

I have read all of his books, and if I had to choose the one that stands out the most, it would be this one.

If you don��t know who he is, I have to mention that he has a World Champion title for his win in the $10,000 buy-in WSOP main event, and even made back to back final tables in 2003 and 2004.

This is a huge achievement in itself, so I guess he has some good ideas to share.

Similarly to other books on tournaments, Harrington starts explaining vital information and the math part of the game, and then moves to analyze different playing styles.

This part will help you understand how to adjust your strategy against different players in MTTs – a game-changer for most.

Then, instead of analyzing different stack depth play, he divides the book into separate sections for the preflop, flop, turn, and river play.

On top of that, he breaks down numerous situations in the examples and helps you build an understanding of how you should be approaching tournaments in the first place.

With more than 370 pages of valuable material, this is a poker classic you should read.

17. Phil Gordon’s Little Green Book �C Phil Gordon

SUMMARY: poker psychology to help you think outside the box in games

Phil Gordon used to play in the biggest games with some of the best poker players and came out standing tall, and even helped teach players too.

After spending years playing and coaching, he decided to put everything he knew about Texas Hold ��em in a book.

As a more generalist poker book, he covers math, strategy, and the psychology of the game.

What I liked the most about this book is that Gordon shares his ideas about the decision making process and approaching various spots, which helps you think a bit outside the box.

Understanding how he thinks will help you to follow vital adjustments, learn to change gears when playing, and know how to react no matter what comes your way.

Being an avid poker student himself, Gordon stresses the importance of learning and progression, which is one of the most valuable skills you can master.

16. Poker Math That Matters �C Owen Gaines

SUMMARY: a simple breakdown of complicated poker math

This is the first book on the list that concentrates precisely on the math part of poker.

Since this is a numbers game, there is no way you can become a winning player without understanding these concepts, and Owen Gaines does a good job of explaining it in a simple way.

It covers absolutely everything you could think of on the topic.

Starting from pot odds, implied odds, and equity calculations, Gaines moves to explain expected value (EV) calculations and shares simple rules to make this whole learning process much easier.

He also covers the math behind various plays, such as set mining, semi-bluffing, hero calling, and much more.

After reading this book, you will have a much deeper understanding of poker and can make educated, math-based decisions instead of just guessing at the tables.

15. Modern Poker Theory: Building an Unbeatable Strategy Based on GTO Principles �C  Michael Acevedo

SUMMARY: advanced poker math

Just like the one above, this book concentrates on the mathematical part of the game, but takes a much more advanced route.

Instead of covering random numbers, Michael Acevedo concentrates on breaking down game theory optimal (GTO) play and explains how to implement this knowledge in real games.

GTO helps you understand the underlying theory of Texas Hold ��em and ultimately make much better decisions in the long run.

And since the author has a background in mathematics and even worked as a financial analyst, he really gets the math behind theoretically optimal play.

You’l get up-to-date information not just on the strategy part but also on the available software that you can use to improve your play.  

Acevedo then breaks down preflop play theory behind cash games and tournaments and moves to explaining all the vital concepts for post-flop considerations, such as bet sizing, balancing your ranges, using proper bluff and value hand ratio, and much more.

He begins explaining simple truths behind poker and only then moves to advanced strategies, so even if you aren��t very experienced, you’ll get a hold on most of the information.

This book alone can help you build a very solid understanding of Texas Hold ��em and come out as a much better player as a result. 

14. Elements of Poker �C ��ommy Angelo

SUMMARY: how to become a well-rounded player  

Elements of Poker is not a strategy book, but rather your guide on how to approach poker to have long-term success.

Tommy Angelo covers something that most poker books leave aside, making this a well worth read.

To succeed in the long run, you need to know much more than just strategy.

You have to learn how to prevent spewing money and tilting, how to manage your money, how to find the best games, when to quit, how to control your emotions, and more.

After reading this book, you’ll understand all the elements of live and online poker, as well as how to approach both tournaments and cash games.

It will give you the solid foundations you need before mastering your strategy.

13. Kill Everyone �C Lee Nelson

SUMMARY: tips of poker tells, along with plenty of hand illustrations and charts

Even though Kill Everyone has a section for cash games, this isn’t the main purpose of this book. You can find better options for that.

That being said, it��s a great read for tournament players and should be considered as a book for them.

One thing worth mentioning is the chapter on poker tells. It includes advice on how to counter better players, which is very useful to understand.

So the book starts by comparing the ��old school�� strategies versus the ones used in today’s games with tips on how to take advantage of this information.

Then Nelson takes a standard route of explaining things by separately covering early and later stages play and all the strategies that come with it.

In the new version of this book, you’ll find Bertrand ��Elky�� Grospellier comments on every chapter where he shares his thoughts and strategies, giving you valuable insights.

On top of that, simple things like hand illustrations and full-color charts make this book very easy to follow, making it a valuable addition to this list.

12. Playing The Player �C Ed Miller

SUMMARY: how to adjust to different playing styles

Ed Miller is a well-known author, and even though he has written many books concentrating on math and general strategy, this one takes a different route and covers how to adjust to different playing styles.

The best poker players understand the importance of adjusting their strategy, but very few can do it in the right way, and Miller strives to change that.

He explains what optimal poker is, how to counter tight players by stealing more pots, what to do when facing loose-aggressive opponents, and how to adjust to weaker ones.

These are the main topics of this book, but Miller goes even further by breaking down how to play against each of these groups preflop, how to change your strategy postflop to win even more, and how to exploit their mistakes.

He also explains how to profile your opponents so that you always know who you’re up against, and that can be a turning point in your poker career.

11. The Myth of Poker Talent �C Alexander Fitzgerald

SUMMARY: essential topics for players studying poker

I like this book because it shows the importance of working on your game and constantly improving.

Fitzgerald highlights how to use the right poker software, and breaks down Heads-Up Display (HUD) stats that can help you learn and make better decisions when playing.

He goes beyond general stuff, sharing math-based shoving and re-shoving ranges plus a breakdown of the most important parts of the game.

You will find topics such as c-betting, check-raising, donk betting, triple barreling and many more.

Explaining the theory behind these plays, he also shows how to think by yourself so that you can make good decisions in other situations as well.

Fitzgerald is a well-known coach who has published hundreds of videos, coached many players, and has impressive results himself, which makes him a good teacher.

10. Every Hand Revealed �C Gus Hansen

SUMMARY: Gus Hansen��s playing style and thought processes explained

This book helps you get inside Gus Hansen‘s head and follows his journey to winning the Aussie Millions Championship by revealing hands he played in this tournament and breaking down his thought process.

Hansen is known as one of the most aggressive players around, and often even called a maniac, but when you see his explanation of the aggressive lines he might not seem so ��crazy�� after all.

His opponents could hardly deal with him when he was on top of his game, so you can learn a thing or two from his approach.

This poker book offers you a unique format, where you get to see how Hansen progressed through five days of play and an analysis of the most interesting hands, giving you a clear understanding of underlying principles for his play.

Also, he shares general advice on how to play in various situations like high-ante games, how to adjust when the tables get short-handed, how to put pressure, and much more.

It��s definitely an intersting read and you��ll pick up some useful insights along the way.

9. Strategies for Beating Small Stakes Poker Tournaments – Jonathan Little

SUMMARY: how to win low stakes games by understanding low stakes players

Jonathan Little has put together a very useful resource for anyone playing low stakes tournaments.

While this book might not help you crush the best players in the world, you��ll get a great understanding of underlying principles of lower games and making necessary adjustments.

If you��ve ever felt that you��re losing against random players who don��t seem to understand what they��re doing, you should read this book.

Instead of blaming bad luck, this book will help you understand how to adjust in these games, and how to change your strategy against weaker opponents to win more often.

I like that Little distinguishes various player types and suggests how to play against each of those.

It will give you a good understanding of how to counter aggressive or passive opponents and how to deal with nits or maniacs.

8. Winning Low-Limit Hold’em – Lee Jones

SUMMARY: cash game strategy tips, with quizzes to keep you on your toes

Like the previous book for tournaments, this one also concentrates on low stakes games but focuses on cash game strategy.

Instead of concentrating on how to adjust to different players, Jones lays down solid strategy foundations and shows how to read the board, understand pot odds and other vital topics.

The author explains strategies based on your position at the table and shares how to play preflop in probably any situation you can think of.

There��s even a quiz at the end of this section to test your knowledge and make sure you took everything in.

For the post-flop section, Jones talks about how to play in various poker hand combinations.

If you ever wondered what to do when you flop a pair, how to proceed with trips, draws, overcards, or when you completely miss, you��ll find all the answers here.

Just like in the preflop section, there are more quizzes that make the whole reading experience way more enjoyable and even entertaining.

I think this book will give you a great understanding of the game and how to approach different spots when you are just starting with poker.

7. Excelling At No-Limit Hold��em �CJonathan Little

SUMMARY: poker pros discussing different approaches to situations

This could be one of the most interesting books you ever read.

Jonathan Little gathered a group of professional players who sat down to discuss the strategy for various Texas Hold ��em situations.

This means that you’ll discover how different players think about the same spot and learn from well-known names such as Phil Helmuth, Chris Moneymaker, Olivier Busquet, and many more.

The good news is that they cover everything from beginning in the low games, moving up the stakes, analyzing tells to playing specific tournament formats, and beyond.

When they explain the basics of the game, they move to way more advanced concepts and cover topics such as analyzing ranges, GTO approach, short stack strategies, final table play, and more.

If that��s not enough, you get to read about the importance of psychology in the game.

Two renowned experts, Elliot Roe and Jared Tendler, will help you see the whole picture, understand the mental side of the game, and learn how to avoid tilting.

This book helps you see how different players approach the game, which is very beneficial for growing as a player.

I enjoyed the format of this book, and think you will too when you read it.

6. Exploitative Play in Live Poker – Alexander Fitzgerald

SUMMARY: how to manipulate other players in live games into making mistakes

This is the second book by Alexander Fitzgerald on the list and the one that I liked even more.

There aren��t that many books concentrating on live poker, so if you are actually playing in a local casino or often join a home game with your friends, this is a must-read for you.

Playing online and in live games can be very different, and if you��re not able to adjust to different players, you will surely leave a lot of money on the table.

This book will help you avoiding doing that.

Fitzgerald suggests the idea of forcing other players into making mistakes.

You��ll learn how to manipulate your opponents into making the plays that you want them to make, and then exploiting it with effective counter-strategies.

Live games are all about exploiting others, so even though understanding GTO strategy is a great starting point, this book will help you think differently and learn how to put others in very uncomfortable situations.

It will help you understand how various players think about the game, which will help you see poker in the whole new light.

5. Reading Poker Tells �C Zachary Elwood

SUMMARY: an easy-to-follow guide on understanding poker tells

I have read this book and seen Zachary Elwood��s training videos, so I can safely say the man knows what he��s talking about.

His book concentrates on explaining people’s behavior and helps you read other players at the table.

Elwood explains everything in a very simple and easy-to-understand way, which is always a huge bonus when talking about complex topics like this one.

I like that he distinguishes poker tells of players who are waiting for action from tells in scenarios where they are betting or checking themselves (completely different situations that often can have contrary tells).

He also groups the chapters by tells that indicate weakness or strength, which makes it really easy to follow.

After reading this book, you��ll understand common verbal and behavioral tells as well as general poker psychology.

On top of that, you’ll learn how to deceive your actions and manipulate your opponents or spot when they are trying to do it to you, which will put a lot of cash in your pockets.

4. Essential Poker Math �C Alton Hardin

SUMMARY: poker math made simple �C a great guide for beginners

Math is an essential part of Texas Hold ��em strategy, so whether you like it or not, you need to learn the basics.

This is where Alton Hardin does a great job. He explains poker math in a simple manner, which could be a huge advantage to new players.

You don��t need to make complex calculations when playing, but understanding the underlying principles of decision making will help you improve almost at once.

In this poker book, you will learn about probabilities and odds, equity and EV calculations, card combinatory, pot and implied odds, and mathematical explanation of various plays.

Hardin also takes all of the theory and shows how it works in practice by analyzing hands and breaking down all of the concepts.

This part is very beneficial for new players because it helps you see how everything works in reality and that it��s not as hard as it might seem in the beginning.

You’ll get all the Texas Hold ��em math that you need to know in one place and can build very solid fundamentals for your play.

3. The Mental Game of Poker �C Jared Tendler

SUMMARY: an essential guide to handling the emotional side of poker

Many players underestimate the importance of psychology in poker and choose to ignore this topic, which costs them a lot of money in the long run.

To be honest, I was one of such players when I started in poker and lost a lot of money due to tilting and making emotional decisions.

Luckily, I found this book by Jared Tendler at the right time.

Learning to deal with such swings is vital, or you won��t be able to compete at a higher level.

Tendler clearly explains this topic and gives you step-by-step advice on how to handle variance, permanently fix tilting issues, control your emotions, and avoid all the pitfalls that you��re almost guaranteed to face.

You might be forced to read this book a couple of times to properly understand and implement all of his advice. At least that��s what I did.

Even if you only take one thing away from this book, it will pay off no matter what games you��re playing.

2. The Theory of Poker – David Sklansky

SUMMARY: a must-read classic for any poker player

This book has stood the test of time and is known for being one of the best poker books ever written.

Although it doesn��t cover cutting-edge strategies like GTO poker, it gives you everything you need to know about approaching the game in the right way.

If I tried to mention everything inside the book, it’d take me a full page just to list the topics.

You can be sure to find all of the important information, like math for various situations, explanation of different plays, advice on reading hands, poker psychology, and even a general approach to the game.

It��s also worth mentioning that you can apply this knowledge not just in Texas Hold ��em but in other formats as well.

It gives you everything in one place to learn the fundamental theory of poker, which will help you become a better player.

An essential read.

1. Applications of No-Limit Hold em �C Matthew Janda

SUMMARY: an essential guide to mastering Texas Hold ��em strategy

Applications of No-Limit Hold ’em is easily my favorite poker book and one that helped me learn the most.

If your goal is to master Texas Hold ��em strategy, I doubt you will find a better option than this.

This book will help you build a solid understanding of how to play your entire ranges, not just the individual hands.

Without a doubt, it is the most important concept for serious poker players.

All of this might sound complicated, and to be honest, it is.

However, Janda does a great job by giving many examples to illustrate his points, so even if you aren��t an experienced grinder, you��ll be able to understand what he is trying to teach.

He covers many topics with extremely in-depth analyses, so you will not only be able to see the right moves but also understand why they��re right.

And that is way more important.

Things like over betting or balancing your ranges for multiple bet sizing can be very complex to figure out on your own, but with the right guidance it��s much easier.

That being said, you should not expect to quickly skim over this book and go to crush everyone at your games.

I do believe you will need to revisit some of the chapters, just because there is so much information that it��s impossible to memorize everything at once and understand how to use it.

If you want to get the most from this book, you��ll need to put in the work yourself.

The good news is that Janda shares a lot of useful tables with various range examples and math explanations.

He breaks down all the content in an easy-to-follow way and starts by explaining a theoretically sound approach for preflop play and analyzes various situations.

Then the author moves to postflop strategy on different streets, facing different situations and sizing. I can��t even think of a situation that isn’t covered inside.

He ends the book by explaining how to use all this theory in practice by analyzing real hand examples so that everything sinks in.

I do think this is the best poker book on Texas Hold ��em, so if you don��t have it yet, be sure to get yourself a copy so you don’t miss out on its valuable information.

From roulette to slots, every single game has an in-built advantage for the casino that is commonly referred to as the house edge.

The edge is usually around a few percentage points (differing from one game to another), guaranteeing that the casino will make money in the long-term.

But poker is different.

Whether online or live, it isn��t played against the house.

You play against other players and win money from them, or they win money from you – but not from the casino.

The casino has no vested interest in who wins or loses, and the dealer is only there to deal the cards and keep track of the game.

So, what��s in it for the casino?

How does a casino make any money from poker and what makes organizing tournaments and keeping cash game tables going an attractive option for them?

The answer to this question is a small, four-letter word, which plays an important part in the overall poker economy.

That word is RAKE, and we��re not talking about a garden tool used to pick up leaves that have been piling up in front of your house.

Understanding The Basics Of Rake

In poker, “rake” is a percentage of money that a casino keeps from almost every cash game pot or tournament entry fee, a bit like a tax.

I’ll cover this subject in more detail later, explaining finer nuances of rake from the casino, as well as the player��s perspective.

You won��t just find out how casinos make money from poker but also how rake can influence your bottom line as a poker player.

Even if you’re just a casual player and don’t think this information isn��t of particular importance to you, it’s still good to understand rake and how it works.

Cash Games With Fixed Percentage Rake

In a cash game, whether it is No-Limit Hold��em, PLO, or any other form of poker out there, the rake is taken out of a great majority of pots before they are handed over to the winner.

In most casinos, it’s a fixed percentage, going anywhere from 2-10% of the total pot.

Both of these extremes are quite rare as in most games you��ll be paying rake of 3-5%.

Usually, there’s also a maximum cap on the amount of rake that can be taken out of any individual pot, that is based on the particular casino��s rules.

It isn��t unusual for people to sit with very deep stacks (500 big blinds or more), and if two such players end up in an all-in scenario, having no cap on maximum rake could end up being very costly for them.

Still, some venues do go with the no cap rule, but these are not the games you want to be playing.

Let��s look at a quick example, just for the sake of clarity.

You are playing $1/$2 game, and end up in an all-in situation where you put all of your $300 preflop against another player with a similar stack.

Let��s say the rake is set at 5% with the $10 cap, so the maximum you’re paying for casino services will be 10$ from each pot you win.

However, if the casino has no cap on the rake and the total pot is $600 as in this example, you will have to pay $30, which is three times more than in the first scenario.

Hourly Rate Option

Although a fixed percentage rake is the most popular for cash games, some casinos employ a different model.

Sometimes you can find yourself in a game, where you have to pay an hourly fee to sit at the table.

It means that there will be no money taken from the pot when you play, and instead, you’ll be paying a fixed fee.

Neither of these options is better or worse, so you should see it just as a different model and know about its existence.

Differences Based On The Stakes

It’s important to mention that most small limit games are actually worse than the higher ones in terms of rake.

In $1/$2 games, you��ll often have a rake of 5%+ and a fairly high cap.

Higher limit tables usually have a rake of around 3% and the cap is also lower relative to the stakes.

Although this may seem unfair to small stakes players, it��s not hard to understand why when looking at it from a business perspective.

Whether you��re playing with $2 or $100 blinds, you��re still occupying a table and need a constant dealer presence to keep the game going.

So, to make it feasible at lower limits, casinos have to take higher rake compared to the blinds to offer their services.

Tournaments

Tournaments are a completely different game format where players compete for chips and try to outlast others in the event to reach the money stage.

This means that chip pots don��t have monetary value and casinos can��t get their rake the same way they do in cash games.

Instead, tournament rake is paid ahead of time as a part of the buy-in.

For example, a $100 tournament will often have a buy-in of $110 or $120.

This extra $10 or $20 on top of that $100 is the rake and it doesn��t go towards the prize pool.

This amount is withheld by the casino and used to cover their expenses for organizing the event.

If you play tournaments and pay attention to rake, you��ll find that online games often have much smaller rake than the live ones, especially at lower stakes.

Obviously, this is easy to explain.

Online platforms don’t have many extra expenses when launching tournaments, while live venues have to pay for dealers, rent tournament floor space, tables and organize everything to have a pleasant event, which comes at an extra cost for players.

Beyond Rake: How Else Do Live Casinos Make Money From Poker?

Although rake is the main source of income from poker games, the profits aren’t that big when compared to other casino games.

In fact, many casinos are happy to break even when organizing a big tournament and benefit on the side.

While this may not make much sense at first glance, it’s perfectly reasonable if we look at the wider picture.

First of all, tournaments will often serve as great feeders for cash games, which is great news for casinos that have big poker rooms.

Casinos make much more money from cash games since a long cash session can net them a hefty amount of cash without any exposure. A nice way to generate some extra money for the house.

Beyond this, big tournaments with solid guarantees are a sure way to get significant foot traffic through the door.

Many of those visiting the casino aren��t exclusively poker players.

They��re likely to find their way to table games and slots after the tournament, which means that over a few days, the casino will be stacking a lot of extra money from these players.

Add to this any revenue generated by other services offered, such as food, drinks, and accommodation, and you can soon see why casinos are more than happy to welcome players for poker tournaments.

Big Profit Margins For Online Poker Rooms

As previously noted, online operators don��t have as many expenses connected with running a poker room.

For example, they don��t need a few dozen dealers to run a tournament with 2,000+ entries. They also don��t need to reserve a vast amount of space for such an event.

Since it all happens virtually, once they have good software they just need stable servers that can handle the traffic.

For these reasons, rake alone can be a huge income generator for online poker rooms and casinos.

Even without players wandering off to blackjack and roulette tables, they can earn more than enough to pay for the operation and still make a profit providing they have enough player traffic.

However, nowadays it’s not unusual to find some casino games right in the poker lobby, like you would at a land-based casino.

Know Your Rake

Even if you��ve never heard of rake before, it should come as no surprise that casinos are making money from poker games.

After all, they’re doing it with everything else so why would poker be any different?

It’s worth researching rake in the games you usually play as this can have a big influence on your bottom line.

Games with unreasonably high levels of rake and very high caps (or no cap at all) can be very difficult to beat – even if you��re an excellent player.

If there is more than one option available to you, a game with lower rake could be worth checking out.

Unless there is a significant discrepancy in the players�� skill level, you��ll be making much more money when the rake is lower.

That said, the game also includes the risk of losing money and is a form of gambling, which is why many people avoid it in the first place.

This is the exact reason why many free online poker sites have had great success, allowing players to play poker without any risks or negative connotations.

Today, we want to look at the best places on the internet where you can play online poker without any risk of losing money at the tables.

Free online poker may not seem too fun at first but it can be really exciting, especially on social sites where you can talk smack and play any style of poker you want without any danger.

1. PlayWSOP

The World Series of Poker (WSOP) is yet another famous tournament brand that has decided to offer players a chance to practice their poker skills for free.

PlayWSOP is a free-to-play poker app that offers No-Limit Hold��em and Pot-Limit Omaha games to players in all variations.

Whether you��re a tournament or cash game aficionado, there are reasonable options for you to get involved at PlayWSOP.

The platform is extremely easy to use, as you can register with just a couple of clicks using your Facebook or Google account to sign in to the platform.

Once signed in, you will be introduced to the game of poker, with a virtual tour offered to all brand new players who are still learning the game and need a basic walkthrough.

For the more experienced players, the option to jump right into the action is also available, with plenty of tables just waiting for someone to fill up the seats.

PlayWSOP allows players to add other players to their buddy list, chat at the tables, win play money by participating in a simple slot-style game, and much more.

You can play on your desktop or mobile device, with the platform available as both a browser-based one and a downloadable mobile app for Android and iOS devices.

Overall, PlayWSOP is probably one of the best online poker experiences you don��t have to pay for, and it��s a game that any poker enthusiast will enjoy very much.

2. Replay Poker

Replay Poker is another free online poker platform with a large player pool and plenty of different game options.

Replay Poker may not be sponsored by the likes of WSOP, but it offers an experience at a very similar level.

The poker client is quite modern and sleek, allowing for smooth gameplay and an enjoyable time at the tables.

Both cash games and tournaments are offered with various stakes and levels available.

Among the games offered, you will find Texas Hold��em, Pot Limit Omaha, Omaha Hi/Lo, and even Royal Poker, a unique version of Texas Hold��em with only high cards in the deck (10s and up).

Unlike some of the competitors, Replay Poker only offers an instant play version for internet browsers, with no downloadable mobile app available currently.

However, the instant play version should be good enough for most players as it looks great and is fast and smooth without any major glitches.

Replay Poker is another great place to learn how to play several different versions of the game of poker and build up your poker skills in a safe and reliable environment.

3. 247Poker

If you don’t feel like playing against real poker players and would rather test your poker skills and wits against computer-based AI opponents, 247Poker is the place for you.

Unlike PlayWSOP, 247Poker is not a social game in any sense, as you are always pitted against AI players.

Logging into the platform for the first time, you will be asked to choose your difficulty between easy, normal, hard, and expert.

Regardless of the difficulty you pick, you will be taken to a six-max poker table, where five AI-controlled players will be waiting to take you on.

The games will become more difficult and aggressive as you up the level of the AI, but for the most part, savvy poker players will be able to beat it.

Yet, if you are very new to the game, 247Poker is a great place to get started without anyone rushing you or making extremely weird plays, which can happen at other free-to-play poker platforms.

At 247Poker, you can practice some basic poker skills and actually develop reasonable hand-reading abilities while risking nothing, which is why I highly recommend it as a training tool for novice players.

4. PokerStars Play

The vast majority of all poker players worldwide have played at PokerStars at some point in their lives, and they know that PokerStars is a real money poker platform.

But the operator also offers a completely free version of the site, PokerStars Play, where you can experience much of the same atmosphere and gameplay options, with the major difference being that no real money changes hands here.

Unlike most free-to-play poker sites and apps, PokerStars Play offers a multitude of more unique online poker games, including the likes of 5 Card Draw, 7 Card Stud, and 8 Game.

When it comes to the quality of the software itself, no one can really compete with PokerStars, which is another major upside for this platform.

5. Global Poker

Global Poker has become one of the largest free-to-play online poker apps out there, mostly due to the fact it also offers a separate “sweepstakes” mode in which players can actually win some real money.

Unfortunately for players from the rest of the world, Global Poker is only available in the United States, which means players from other countries can��t even register for an account.

That said, those who can play are welcomed to Global Poker with a small bankroll of free play money, which can be easily replenished with additional chip purchases.

Players can purchase Gold Coins at their leisure and enjoy plenty of exciting free poker games without any real risks or profits, just entertainment.

Global Poker players are also awarded Sweeps Coins when they purchase Gold Coins, and these can be used at separate tables. Any Sweeps Coins you end up winning can be converted into real money.

Global Poker is one of the few free online poker sites where players can be awarded real money for their play as well while not risking real money at the tables at all.

6. ClubGG Poker

Powered by another of the world��s leading poker platforms, ClubGG is a free-play copy of GGPoker, the only real contender other than PokerStars for the title of the biggest online poker platform.

Playing at ClubGG comes with a whole host of perks. For one, you will be playing on one of the best online poker platforms out there, almost identical to the real money GGPoker.

In addition to that, you��ll have access to all types of games and formats offered by GGPoker, without any of the risks.

All games at ClubGG are play money games, making the platform available in all jurisdictions, not just those in which GGPoker offers real money options.

To top it all off, for a monthly fee of $49.99, you can also get the Platinum Subscription. This allows you to enter freeroll tournaments where you can win seats in the WSOP Main Event and other valuable prizes.

At ClubGG, you get to pick the kinds of games you play, and if you��re willing to pay the monthly subscription, you actually get to compete for extremely valuable prizes without much risk.

Social Poker Platforms

We��ve covered some of the most popular free-play online poker platforms provided by major online poker operators, but what about social poker games?

If you have been on Facebook and other social networks over the past decade, you have probably seen the ads for various games, and these are definitely worth a mention here as well.

1. Zynga Poker

Zynga Poker has been around longer than most other free-play online poker options, and is mainly played by Facebook users.

Zynga Poker is all about the game’s social element, as the platform offers countless ways to interact with other players both at the tables and off them.

Unlike the normal free-play poker platforms, Zynga Poker is a great place to connect with new friends and meet people with similar interests.

The platform may not be as great as PokerStars or GGPoker, but it does the trick and the games run fairly smoothly, with both cash games and SNGs running at various levels and stakes.

2. Viber World Poker Club

Published by Viber Media, the developers of one of the biggest social apps out there, Viber World Poker Club is another amazing social poker game you can enjoy with your friends.

The platform includes all sorts of features and options, including weekly tournaments, player rewards, free chips, and fun and addictive mechanics.

The best part about Viber World Poker Club is that it��s completely free. You won��t have to pay any subscriptions or buy anything to participate in the games.

Viber World Poker Club also comes with a massive base of active players you can play with, making it one of the best places to play poker socially these days.

3. PokerUp: Social Poker

Another great social poker app dedicated to social games is PokerUp.

It has quite a unique model and lets you challenge anyone from your contacts list, making it a truly fun experience.

Rather than playing with strangers, you can invite up to three players and battle it out among friends.

Of course, you can still play with users from all over the world if you choose to and even climb the leaderboard to boost your rankings.

Like every good poker app, PokerUp lets you customize the look of your tables, use various emojis, and simply have fun while playing.

All in all, it is a very convenient way to play some poker when you are on the go, so give it a try.

Tilt clouds your judgement, and it��s one of the most dangerous things a player can experience.

This is because you’ll make a bad decision based on your emotions, likely resulting in a negative outcome, which will only make you tilt further and play even worse.

It can quickly become a dangerous rabbit hole without an easy way out, so you should try to avoid it.

Don��t Worry, Everybody Tilts

As dangerous as tilt may be, there is no simple recipe you can follow to avoid it completely.

Everybody tilts.

Even the best players in the game you may have seen on TV playing in ridiculously high stakes cash games are subject to tilting.

One thing that separates top players from the rest is the ability to concentrate on making decisions, rather than short-term outcomes.

If you focus on your short term results, it doesn��t matter how good you are, you will be tilting a lot. In fact, the better you play, the more likely you are to tilt when things don��t go your way.

This sensation is caused primarily by a sense of injustice. You did everything right and still lost the pot or busted the tournament. How can you not feel bad about it?

By understanding the harsh reality of the game, you can make things much easier for you.

What is a bad beat? If you had AA against 22 and lost a preflop all-in, is it just very unlucky?

In reality, your opponent had around an 18% chance to win, and that is going to happen almost 1 out of 5 times.

In the long run, you��re still going to win 82% of the time, so getting mad because now was your time to lose is ridiculous, to say the least.

Of course, this is just one example, and many different things can trigger tilting for you.

But if you concentrate only on making the best possible decision with all available information and leave short term results aside, you��ll avoid a big part of negative emotions.

While you probably won��t be able to avoid tilting in all of its forms, it��s what you do when this happens and how you handle your tilt that makes the difference.

Understanding Your Tilt Triggers

The above example is just one of many causes of tilt at a poker table. Not everyone gets triggered by the same things.

Some of the most common tilt triggers are:

• Bad beats
• Coolers
• Table banter
• The overall atmosphere in a room
• Your own mistakes
• Playing when tired

These and other factors can trigger negative emotions, which can and will influence your play if you don��t keep them in check.

Depending on your personality type, you might get annoyed more easily than some other players.

While this isn��t the best trait to have if you want to make money in poker, it��s not the end of the world, either, as long as you understand the problem and approach it the right way.

Consciously Decide To Not Let Your Emotions Control You

While some of the tilt triggers vary from one person to another, most players are prone to tilt after an ugly bad beat or series of coolers.

Basically, an extended run of bad luck can put many players off of their A-game, even if they have good technical knowledge.

As I��ve already explained, this is just being human.

In a scenario where you did nothing wrong and still lost, simply due to another player getting very lucky, it��s normal to get upset.

But you need to learn how to recognize it and consciously choose to not let your emotions control you. Focus on your decisions instead of results.

The thing is, bad beats will happen time and time again for as long as you play poker. It��s just how variance works.

You can��t afford to stay focused on the results of past hands as if these are somehow indicators of what will happen in the future.

If your pocket aces got cracked three times in a row, you shouldn��t play them any differently the next time you get them (provided you didn��t make any mistakes the previous three times).

Of course, this is easier said than done. Once that sinking feeling starts creeping in that no matter what you do, you��ll lose, it��s tough.

The hardest part is recognizing and admitting that you��re on tilt.

If things aren��t going your way and variance is smacking you in the face, you should be extra careful and take time with your decisions.

Once you find yourself on a losing side of things, you might start throwing good money after bad, playing hands you��d never play, either chasing your losses or adopting the ��it doesn��t matter what I do anyway�� mentality.

The moment you notice this happening, it��s time to act.

Most people struggle to regain their composure at the table, so take a short break. Go for a brief walk, grab a snack, meditate for five minutes, or do whatever it is that can help calm you down.

And if you come back and still can��t play without emotions getting in the way, call it a night if it��s a cash game. You��ll be much better off coming back fresh another time.

Don��t Be Too Harsh On Yourself

Let��s get one thing out of the way right at the start �C you��ll never play perfect poker. No one plays perfect poker and everybody makes mistakes.

You’ll make mistakes and they will cost you money.

However, dwelling on these mistakes while you��re still playing can be very dangerous and lead to a completely different type of tilt.

If you make a mistake that causes you to lose a significant pot, that��s that. That opportunity is gone, that pot is lost, and the best you can do is focus on the next hand and try to play it the best you can.

However, it��s not uncommon to get into a frame of mind where you��re stuck on that one mistake, and all your future actions are somehow dictated by it.

I screwed up already, so what does it matter?

But it does matter, of course.

You lost one hand, but there are many, many more ahead.

As long as you have chips in front of you, you have a chance to turn things around. Even if you��re in a tournament left with just five big blinds, make the best possible decisions you have with those few chips.

There were plenty of times I recovered and even won tournaments after only having a couple of big blinds, and that��s not as rare as you probably think. I

f you concentrate only on making the best possible decisions, you��ll surprise yourself with the results.

One tip is to make a note of any hand you think you played badly and mentally file it for later revision. So, you��re not really ��forgiving�� yourself, but you��re not letting it affect your play, either.

Once you��re back home and ready for it, you can go through any questionable hands and see what you could have done differently.

Once you adopt this strategy, it will be much easier to move on from poorly played hands and avoid compounding your losses by making more bad decisions just because of that one that got away.

Physical Readiness Is Key For Tilt Management

Poker may not seem like a particularly hard activity in a physical sense, but you can��t separate your mental and physical readiness.

When it comes to tilting, playing rested, well-fed, and leaving your other problems aside for the duration of the sessions is very important.

You��ll become much more susceptible to tilt if you��re playing when tired or have a million things on your mind.

Take Care Of Yourself

Taking good care of yourself is probably one of the most basic but essential things you need to do to be a successful poker player.

It��s much easier to deal with bad beats when you��re playing a session after a good night��s sleep than trying to power through it, having slept only for a few hours.

I have tried the latter approach many times over my poker career and can confirm that there is a vast difference between these options.

The same could be said about food. If you��re hungry, it will be much easier to get annoyed, even at things that wouldn��t usually bother you. So, tilt prevention starts long before you sit down to play.

I��m not going to try and give you an exact plan of what you should be eating to improve your efficiency, but following a balanced diet and avoiding overly salty and sweet stuff can take you a long way.

There are many great guides out there that can help with that.

It��s also worth mentioning that you definitely want to eat before you start playing, especially if you��re planning for a long session. Either that or have a dinner scheduled at some point and make sure not to skip it.

Leave Your Problems At The Door

Whatever problems or issues you��re dealing with need to be put on hold until you��re done playing.

You won��t be able to sort them out at the table, and they��ll still be there when you��re done, so focus on playing your best poker.

I know it��s easier said than done but if you want to play seriously, you need to learn how to do it.

One thing that helped me the most was devoting some time to prepare before every session you sit down to play.

It can be as little as 5-10 minutes to review some hands, read strategy articles, or discuss poker theory with a friend to warm up your brains and get into the state of playing poker.

It really helped me leave other issues behind, and hopefully, it can do the same for you. 

On top of that, when you get used to doing a warm-up, you��ll be able to recognize your emotions and notice when you shouldn��t be playing at all.

Skipping a session when you��re feeling bad could be the best decision you can make.

Don��t Fall Victim To The Winner��s Tilt

Not all forms of tilting are caused by negative emotions.

You can go on what��s known as ��winner��s tilt�� just because you are feeling too good, as ridiculous as it sounds.

You��ve probably experienced the feeling when you seem to soul-read your opponents and drag one pot after another your way.

While it��s a great feeling, it can quickly lead to playing sub-optimally because of the irrational belief that you can take everyone down.

The problem is, you never know when your ��good run�� will end, and if you start deviating from a solid strategy by playing too many hands, your session is very likely to end in a disaster.

The second problem that many players face in this situation is chasing too many draws.

You could lose everything you��ve been accumulating the whole night in a single hand, chasing your flush draw against the odds in the huge pot, simply because you feel it��s your night.

Accept That Tilt Happens

Tilt is a part of poker, just like bluffing, bad beats and everything else, so you need to accept the reality of the game if you want to succeed.

You shouldn��t feel bad when occasionally experiencing tilting at the tables because everyone does it, and it doesn��t have to be a big problem if you��re aware of it and tackle it correctly.

While you��ll probably never become a tilt-free machine that plays the best poker all the time, you can minimize the impact tilt has on your results, which is the goal you should be striving towards.

Now you��re aware of what tilt is in poker, head to our list of the best online poker sites to put these tips into practice.

You can be sure that players will be active in and around big tournaments, share their insights, and strategy tips. If anything is going on in the poker world, players will take it to Twitter and discuss the issue.

I can��t make a definitive list of who you should follow, but players on this lineup are a good choice.

I have to stress that this is not a list of players with the biggest followings on Twitter. You can easily find those yourself.

Instead, I wanted to create a list with ones that I follow and enjoy seeing on my feed.

When you start following these guys, you will get many recommendations, so you can easily make it into an ever-growing list and fill your whole feed with poker players.

1. Daniel Negreanu (@RealKidPoker)

Daniel Negreanu is one of the biggest and best-known names in poker.

The Hall of Famer has won over $46.2 million in live tournament winnings and holds six WSOP bracelets, as well as countless other achievements.

His Twitter feed is mostly filled with poker-related stuff, especially during important events such as WSOP or other series.

But the Canadian �C who got his US Citizenship in 2016 �C is also very vocal about politics, social issues, and other stuff, and isn��t afraid of controversy.

So if you were looking for just Negreanu playing poker, be prepared to get much more than that if you do decide to hit that follow button.

2. Doug Polk (@DougPolkVids)

Doug Polk is a well-known name in high stakes poker circles and was considered one of the best Heads Up Hold��em players for a while, thanks to some great results online.

He��s also won over $9.5 million in live tournament earnings, so there is no question about his poker abilities.

Polk, who��s back after taking a break away from the tables, is worth a follow on Twitter for comedy value (or if you��re a crypto fan).

Although a big shot, he doesn��t shy away from engaging with his followers, so feel free to tweet him.

3. Phil Hellmuth (@phil_hellmuth)

The famous ��Poker Brat�� has an active Twitter account, which is quite Phil-focused, as you��d expect.

Hellmuth may not be on everyone��s list of people to follow, but for many poker fans, he remains one of the world’s greatest poker players.

With 16 WSOP bracelets (more than any other player out there), over $28.4 million in tournament winnings, and several poker books to his name, it��s hard to argue with it.

Phil is doing his share to promote poker, tweeting about any tournmanets he might be playing and engaging with other players.

You��ll also get a a sneak peek behind the scenes of Hellmuth��s personal life, which is always fun to see.

4. Joey Ingram (@Joeingram1)

Joey Ingram could be dubbed the investigative journalist of the poker world.

��Papi�� puts countless hours behind the scenes to unveil the biggest scams and scandals in the poker community, and everyone seems to love it.

If you want to be in the loop about the latest events that don��t always hit the headlines of major news sites, then you should definitely follow Ingram on Twitter.

Equally, if you have a solid reason to believe something is amiss and want someone to look into it, he��s your man.

5. Fedor Holz (@CrownUpGuy)

Fedor Holz is one of the best-known young guns in the poker world. He had an insane run in high roller tournaments, amassing live career winnings of over $33.4 million in just a few years.

He��s had tremendous success playing online, is an ambassador for GGPoker and runs the training site Pokercode  – so he��s a guy who knows a thing or two about poker.

So if you want the latest insights from poker or were just wondering what Holz has been up to lately, his Twitter is where you��ll get all the news.

6. Phil Galfond (@PhilGalfond)

Phil Galfond is one of the brightest poker minds around.

His blogs and forum posts on a variety of topics have always been welcomed by the poker community, not just because he knows what he��s talking about but also because he knows how to write.

Galfond is quite active on Twitter and discusses many topics relevant to the community, such as the use of HUDs, cheating, sharing tips and tricks and more.

He��s definitely worth a follow.

7. Jason Mercier (@JasonMercier)

Closing in on over $20.1 million in live tournament earnings, Mercier crushed the tournament circuit for years, and shared his insights with over 131k followers on Twitter.

If you��ve got kids and want to see how you can balance playing poker with being a parent, be sure to give him a follow as he��s recently returned to the poker scene.

The ��Poker Brat�� was happy to see him return to WSOP this year:

8. Erik Seidel (@Erik_Seidel)

Erik Seidel has always been one of the game��s ��silent assassins.��

Always calm and composed at the tables and never seeking the spotlight, Seidel has amassed well over $40 million in tournament winnings.

If you��re wondering what he��s been up to lately and want to keep up, your best bet is to follow him on Twitter, where he frequently shares insights from everyday life and poker circuit.

He��s got a great sense of humour, so he��s worth a follow for that alone.

9. Shaun Deeb (@shaundeeb)

Known as one of the most outspoken poker players on Twitter, Sean Debb is no stranger to causing a stir.

Times have changed for Sean as he has stepped away from the table for the most part, focusing on raising his family and concentrating on other business ventures.

Despite playing less, he��ll post around the WSOP and other key events, and still can��t resist poking some fun at the likes of Doug Polk and Daniel Negreanu, making for some light relief.

10. Bart Hanson (@BartHanson)

Bart Hanson is a well-known name in the poker circles.

If you keep up with poker on TV or live streams, you might have heard him calling the action and explaining what��s going on. According to many of his peers, Hanson is one of the best commentators around.

Bart isn��t just a commentator, though. In fact, he is a very good poker player with solid results under his belt.

His Twitter feed is full of short poker tips, links to podcasts and training videos explaining different hands and strategy concepts.

If you want to learn more about live games, he should definitely be on your follow list.

One famous example would be WSOP champion Greg ��Fossilman�� Raymer, who used to bring fossils from his personal collection to use as a card protector.

So if you��re looking to get more involved in the live poker scene, you might want to get one for yourself.

Whether you��re looking to grow your personal brand and make a statement or just want one for practical purposes, I’ve got some ideas that could help you decide what to use.

Let’s talk about poker card protectors, why they��re used, and how they can help – or hinder! – you at the poker tables.

What Are Card Protectors?

A card protector is any item you bring to the table to protect your hole cards during hands.

In the most basic sense, a card protector can be used to protect your hand from getting accidentally folded, which can sometimes happen in live poker if your hand or an object is not on top of the cards.

To avoid constantly keeping their hand close to their cards, some players choose to use a card protector, or simply use one of their chips.

However, these items have other purposes than simply protecting the cards.

In fact, they are more often used as talismans and lucky charms than anything else.

Poker players are a fairly superstitious group of people on average, with many recreational players believing luck has more to do with poker than skill, which is why any favor from the poker gods is a welcome sight.

In reality, a poker card protector usually won’t help you that much �C but it won’t hurt you too much either and are often a great talking point.

Not everyone agrees, though. Poker champion and coach Jonathan Little believes there is a strong argument for not using them at all – but more on that late).

For now, let��s look at some ideas to inspire you.

1. Poker Chips

The most common card protector out there is poker chips. Many players don’t bring a particular card protector but rather use the chips they��re playing with to protect their hands.

Using a single chip of the lowest possible denomination is pretty common, although players use other denominations and even groups of chips to protect their cards.

A word of warning: If you��re going to use poker chips as your card protector, make sure you always use the same chip denomination and use the same number of chips to guard your cards.

The reasons are quite obvious, as you don��t want to give away the value of your hand and advertise that you have a premium hand or a medium holding in different situations.

Alternatively, some players use poker chips from other venues or a particular poker chip as their card protector throughout their careers.

Most casinos and poker rooms won��t mind if you bring in a chip that has nothing to do with their chips and use it as a card protector at the tables.

2. Personal Lucky Charms

As we saw with the example of Greg Raymer, some players like to use their own lucky charms at the tables that are totally unrelated to poker.

He used fossils, but I have seen other players use things like little rocks, toys, and other items of sentimental value that they believe bring them good luck.

Religious items are not off the table either, as some players believe religion and poker mix well, and who��s to say they don��t?

Whether you got your good luck charm from your wife, your priest, or your shaman, you can use pretty much any small item that you believe is lucky as your card protector.

Items like coins, small jewelry, and other small items that won��t cover up your cards are fair game and won��t be banned in any cardroom.

There��ll only start being problems at the casino when you start bringing bigger items that completely cover your cards or could be used to interfere with the game in any way.

3. Animal Figurines

Little animal figurines are another popular choice for card protectors.

Some players just think they��re cute, while others have a more superstitious view of things and want to channel energy through their spirit animal.

Either way, pay attention the next time you are at a big poker tournament, and you��ll see that there is no shortage of pandas, dragons, and dinosaurs on top of players�� cards.

Once again, the only thing you should be concerned about is the item not being too big, as you won��t be allowed to use a card protector that covers and hides your hole cards.

4. Cartoon Characters

Like animals, various cartoon character figurines can be used as card protectors, sometimes having a purpose beyond superstition.

If you can find one that��s funny or silly enough, you may start to get some notoriety in the playing field, which is always a good thing.

If you get labeled “The South Park Guy” players will want to play hands with you and, in most cases, will play them less optimally than they would if you were an anonymous player.

Things like props and card protectors can definitely have a purpose in the live poker setting, and you can supplement your poker skills with a little bit of fame and hustle.

After all, players like Phil Hellmuth and others who��ve built their brand on their behavior get all sorts of unsolicited action, so why shouldn��t you try to do the same?

5. Metal Chips

Moving on to metal chips, an item that��s been specifically made for the purpose of protecting cards.

Card protectors have become so popular that companies have started to manufacture items with this particular goal in mind.

If you look through Amazon, eBay or Etsy, you��ll see a variety of silver and golden-colored card protectors with various designs.

They��re usually slightly bigger than your average poker chip and quite heavy in hand, making them ideal for keeping your cards safe from getting folded.

6. LEGO

LEGO isn��t just for kids. You��ll see people using LEGO Minifigures as card protectors quite often in poker.

The reason is that LEGO offers so many different sets, allowing fans of any franchise out there to get a figure that represents their favorite fictional world.

Whether you enjoy Star Wars, Game of Thrones, or Harry Potter, you can easily purchase a LEGO set with your favorite characters in it and show your fellow players what you��re into.

7. Classic Lucky Charms

We��ve already covered personal lucky charms, but if you don��t have one then there are a number of things that are widely considered across different cultures to be lucky.

It��s no wonder, then, that you��ll see quite a few four-leaf clovers, horseshoes, or joker faces being used as card protectors at the poker tables.

Having a horseshoe on top of your cards might seem like a Wild West clich�� but the game you��re playing is Texas Hold��em, after all, so why not!

An Argument Against Card Protectors

So as mentioned at the start of this article, there is an argument against using card protectors altogether.

Jonathan Little is one of the best poker coaches out there and he strongly advises players not to use them.

His reasoning is that using a card protector adds another physical element to the game of poker, which can be used to exploit you and get information about your hand.

He even shared an example of this, where he noticed a player on a final table who was commenting on using a different way of protecting his cards when he had premium hands and when he had medium-strength holdings.

This should obviously be avoided at all costs.

However, even if you��re not so transparent with it, you could still be giving things away with your card protector.

For instance, many poker players look at their cards before it is their turn to act. If they have a hand they want to play with, they will place their card protector on top of the cards.

This alone is enough to tell players in earlier positions that you have a decent hand, which can prompt them to make plays that directly exploit that fact, such as fold hands they wanted to play or trap you with monsters.

While I��m not sure that card protectors should be completely eliminated from the game, Little definitely makes a strong argument.

If his argument isn��t enough to put you off, hopefully this article has given you some good ideas on what items you can use and where to get started.

But how do they prevent cheating and keep players safe?

In this article, we��ll look into various WSOP security aspects and how they dealt with the challenges of moving it online during the pandemic.

The Eye In The Sky And A Huge Security Team

The World Series of Poker has moved to a new Strip location this year �C the Bally��s and Paris Las Vegas Hotels and Casinos �C after 17 years at the Rio Hotel and Casino.

Both are major gaming venues in Las Vegas, so at the WSOP there are all the standard security measures in place you��d expect in a casino.

The entire gaming floor is covered by high-resolution surveillance cameras that follow everything that goes on.

The security teams behind the scenes keep their eyes peeled to the monitors and are ready to react to any suspicious behavior.

Poker tables are crowded and there are tens of thousands of players who come and go, so it may seem virtually impossible to keep everything under control. But that’s just an illusion.

Casino security personnel are used to dealing with huge numbers of visitors and are experts at their job. They know what things to look out for and can quickly spot someone up to no good.

Of course, there is also the security staff on the floor itself.

They observe everything that��s going on and are ready to react if they get a signal from the surveillance room. It��s all one big, well-oiled machine that operates around the clock.

Without strict security, it would be impossible for the WSOP to maintain the integrity of its tournaments.

While most players are fair and honest, what would prevent the dishonest ones from stealing chips from other stacks or cheating in other ways?

To an untrained eye, it may seem like anything goes when there are several thousand people in the room.

But the WSOP��s security team is very alert and quick to react if there is anything questionable going on.

The best proof of this is that in over five decades, there��s not been a single major cheating scandal at the series.

How Does WSOP Protect Winners?

There is no doubt that WSOP has got security covered inside the casinos, but what happens once players step outside?

Tournament winners and even those making a deep run can be carrying quite a bit of cash, making them very desirable targets for criminals.

In 2019, there was a fairly heated debate regarding this issue after one player shared a story about being robbed at the Rio parking lot.

There was an outcry from the community, asking the organizers to provide more security for players to ensure these things didn��t happen again in the future.

As expected, WSOP replied to these complaints and explained what resources are available to players if they feel they need protection.

So, if you don��t feel comfortable going alone, know that all players are allowed to ask one of the WSOP security staff on the floor to accompany them to their car.

This service will be provided with no questions asked.

There is also enhanced security presence inside and outside of the venue during the series, so there are more patrols going around.

Remember that WSOP also offers other alternatives if you’re not comfortable carrying cash.

You can always ask the casino to wire your winnings or use one of the WSOP cages to store your cash safely.

The second option is very safe and quite convenient if you plan on playing more events, as you’ll have cash on-site and can easily access it.

With all that being said, it��s also important to stay alert yourself.

It��s a huge area, so security can’t be present everywhere at all times – you��ll need to be vigilant.

• R. Paul Wilson On: How to Manage Your Cash Before and After a Game

Challenges When WSOP Moved Entirely Online

As you probably know, the 2020 World Series of Poker was held almost entirely online thanks to the Coronavirus outbreak.

Having online WSOP events was nothing new.

For a few years now, players have had an opportunity to compete for coveted bracelets via their electronic devices in select events.

However, this was the first time the entire schedule took place online.

Plus, because of the delicate situation with internet poker, we essentially had two WSOPs �C one for the US players and the other for the international player pool.

This created a whole new set of security challenges and problems that the organizers had to address.

One example being that online cheating techniques are much different from live ones and are often not as easy to detect.

In fact, when WSOP officials announced the online series, many members of the poker community voiced their concerns over potential security issues.

With so much money on the line, there was plenty of incentive for cheating.

Online, some of the biggest security threats include collusion, players using multiple accounts, and using prohibited software.

Jeff Madsen was one of the more vocal players to raise concerns about WSOP online security issues. He put a particular emphasis on the fact that there were actual bracelets up for grabs.

In an online environment, it��s all too easy for someone to take over a tournament at any stage and continue playing under someone else��s name.

This practice, although technically against the rules, has been quite present in the online poker community. But with bracelets on the line, there are some obvious ethical concerns.

In live WSOP events, there is a clear “one player per one hand” rule.

If you tried to get advice from anyone while a hand was in progress, you’d probably end up with a warning and penalty. If such behavior is repeated, you risk being disqualified.

Online, though, this practice is known as “ghosting” and it’s virtually impossible to stop.

Without WSOP dispatching guards to every person’s home to watch them while they play, they can’t know if it’s a single person playing or if they have an entire team behind them to help them make the best decisions.

However, the organizers do have some tools available to them.

While it��s hard for the WSOP to do much on the spot, every tournament is carefully reviewed once the play is finished.

Security experts look for unusual patterns and any inconsistencies that could indicate any form of cheating.

If there are red flags, accounts are subject to a detailed examination.

If cheating is confirmed, the player will be disqualified, their account banned from the platform, and their winnings confiscated and distributed to the legitimate players.

This isn��t a foolproof system, but it��s certainly a deterrent for a majority of those who might think about cheating their way to a bracelet.

Top Security Measures In Place

The WSOP has the experience and resources to keep players safe and its games fair, and there is hardly a challenge they can��t deal with.

Most importantly, whether you play live or online, you can rest assured you��re in good hands and protected against cheaters of all kinds as much as is humanly possible.

In poker, just like in life, nothing is guaranteed, but with a brand like WSOP running things behind the scenes, it��s probably as good as it gets.

Lead image: USA Online Casino

Sometimes they’re intertwined, with one leading to another, creating a vicious circle that can be quite hard to get out of.

While amateurs and recreational players are more likely to make these mistakes, even professionals fall victim from time to time, so it’s good to be aware of them – wherever you are in your poker journey.

1. Playing Too Many Hands Pre-Flop

Texas Hold��em can be a boring game when cards aren��t coming your way. When you catch a run of really bad hole cards, especially when playing live, it can be really annoying.

If you let the frustration and boredom get the better of you, you��re likely to start playing too many hands before the flop, which is one of the ��safest�� ways to start giving your chips away.

Staying disciplined and sticking to proper starting hand ranges – even when you��ve been getting dealt trash hands for two hours straights – is a mark of a good poker player.

If you catch yourself thinking that 7-3 suited looks like an okay hand to call a UTG raise, you��ll be better off getting up and leaving.

Playing too many hands pre-flop is guaranteed to land you in tricky post-flop situations with weak holdings, often leading to substantial losses that could have been easily avoided by simply giving your cards back to the dealer like you were supposed to.

Learn more about what hands to play pre-flop with this poker cheat sheet guide.

2. Overplaying Speculative And Medium-Strength Hands

The “value of your hand�� is a relative term depending on what kind of opposition and action you’re facing.

However, some holdings are just not very strong by definition, like small flushes facing a big raise on the river, second pairs, top pairs with weak kickers, etc.

Some players, especially those new to the game, tend to value these hands way too much, playing them almost as if they had the nuts.

The issue with overplaying these hands is that you��re effectively turning them into bluffs.

These lines might get an opponent to fold a stronger hand here and there, but almost every time they look you up, they��ll have a better hand.

Since these medium-strength hands have a decent showdown value themselves, you don��t need to take aggressive lines with them and should play them for what they��re worth.

3. Acting Too Quickly Without Thinking Things Through

This is a problem for both recreational and professional players alike.

In fact, players who spend a lot of time playing the game will often go on auto-pilot and make decisions without taking enough time to think, which can lead to costly mistakes in poker.

One way to avoid this is by training yourself to never, ever act immediately when it’s your turn.

Always take at least a few seconds to think about all available information.

Take into consideration your opponents’ action, position, sizing, and even verbal tells when you are playing live.

In those few extra seconds, you can gather your thoughts and prevent yourself from making a mistake like calling where you should be raising or folding in a spot where pot odds are way too good, just because you had such an instinct.

4. Failing To Table-Select And Search For Good Games

If you’re looking to make some money then you need to approach the game seriously.

This includes looking for the best games and best situations to make a profit.

Sometimes, it can be annoying to spend time selecting tables online or waiting for your seat in a really good live game.

You��d rather jump straight into action even if it means battling it out with other good players, some even better than yourself.

However, this won’t be profitable and if you play poker for a living or to subsidize some of your expenses, looking for the best tables you can find is part of your job.

Sitting down in any game just to put in some hands is reckless and can also be quite costly in the long run.

5. Not Thinking About Other Players�� Hand Ranges

When you play Hold��em, there are two key pieces of information you need to worry about: Your hand and the cards held by your opponents.

Some players forget to think about the latter and just focus on their own hand.

I am sure that you can see how it can end up being a very costly mistake.

Even though it’s one of the hardest things to master in poker, it is essential to learn how to assign a range of hands to your opponent, instead of just guessing what they could have.

You can simply assign your opponent a range of likely holdings based on their pre-flop position and play, and then reduce possible combinations based on their action when the hand progresses.

This way you will be much more accurate with your decisions compared to putting them on a single hand and sticking with it no matter what.

6. Getting Too Emotional While Playing

With all the bad beats, lucky hits, busted and caught bluffs, a poker session can be a real rollercoaster of emotions.

However, you can��t allow for your emotions to take hold and start influencing your decisions.

Allowing any type of emotion to take over is what we refer to as ��tilt.��

Some players fail to realize there are many different types of tilt and it isn��t always caused by bad beats.

You can go on tilt from running too hot as well, throwing caution to the wind and starting to play way too loose.

The main point to remember is that every time you start doing things at the table that you rationally know you shouldn��t be doing, it��s time to take a break from the session before you make a poor decision.

7. Relying Too Much On Your Stats

Online poker players love tracking software and heads-up displays (HUDs), and for a good reason.

All of these tools can be a great help when playing, giving you a much better idea of your opponents�� playing styles and tendencies in different spots.

However, you shouldn��t let poker statistics become the only thing you pay attention to when playing.

For example, there are situations where players are unlikely to bluff, even if they’re playing an aggressive style in general.

Also, someone might be tilting after a few bad beats and spewing chips, and this won��t show up in their stats as they usually play solid poker.

Obviously, you should take advantage of stats available to you, but don��t let them be the only thing that guides your decisions.

8. Failing To Adjust To Other Players

While it’s important to have a solid game-plan, you should also be prepared to adapt your plan when a specific situation arises.

Some players will fail to adjust to changing dynamics at the table, often to their own detriment.

If a maniac sits down at your table, for example, you can��t continue stealing a bunch of pots before the flop.

Then there might be a player who won��t let you do it, so you need to change your strategy.

If someone isn��t folding out of the big blind, attack them with stronger hands and make bigger raises.

Don��t make small raises with weak hands because they��re completely useless against this type of player.

There are many ways to adjust to different players, and being open to these changes during the play will help you win more and improve much faster.

9. Poor Bankroll Management

Once again, this is a mistake that relates more to serious players.

Sticking to a fairly strict bankroll management plan is essential for success in the long run.

This prevents you from losing all your money or having to go down the limits too fast when you encounter a bad run of cards.

Without proper bankroll, you can��t play.

If you can��t play, you can��t make any money.

And if you can��t make money, then future isn��t looking particularly bright if you want to play poker professionally.

10. Failure To Keep Learning

Some players will work hard to get to the point where they start beating the games.

Once they do, however, they��ll be happy to sit on their laurels and will stop learning and expanding their knowledge.

This can be a very dangerous mistake as there are always others out there just as passionate about the game, and they are ready to study.

If you aren��t keeping up, you��ll fall behind, and all of a sudden, you��ll stop winning.

It can be very hard, not only from a money standpoint but also in terms of self-confidence and motivation.

Avoid this by constantly learning and improving your strategy.

The game changes all the time and players are always getting better – so you can’t afford not to!

We��ll cover everything you need to know, including whether you can get your hands on one without actually winning a World Series of Poker event.

Where The Idea Of WSOP Bracelets Came From

When the World Series of Poker first kicked off in 1970, winners weren��t awarded bracelets. Instead, they got a cup and a fairly common-looking plaque.

It was a nice trophy to have, but it wasn��t unique in any way.

Then, in 1976 Benny Binion – the man who came up with the WSOP concept �C thought of the idea to start awarding bracelets instead.

Benny figured that introducing bracelets for tournament winners would help set the game apart and make it different.

Additionally, bracelets were something players could actually wear while playing, so their competitors could see they were up against a WSOP champion.

Albeit somewhat unusual, the concept was well-received by the players at the time and WSOP bracelets were adopted for the years to come.

During those initial years, the number of bracelets awarded every year was fairly small.

However, as time progressed and poker became more and more popular, the number of bracelet-awarding events increased as well.

How Much Is A WSOP Bracelet Worth?

The World Series of Poker bracelets are probably the most coveted trophies in the poker community, so it’s hard to put a fixed value on them.

As well as this, over the years the design of bracelets has changed quite a bit, and so has its monetary value.

The first bracelet that Benny Binion came up with in 1976 was worth around $500.

For the sake of discussion, it��s worth mentioning that $500 was worth quite a bit more back then than it is now.

The WSOP bracelets of today look quite different, and the ones awarded in most events are probably worth around $1,500.

This is not accounting for the bracelet’s sentimental value or prestige but simply looking at the value of materials used to make them.

However, not all WSOP bracelets are created equal.

Bracelets awarded for the Main Event winners are much more valuable and much flashier.

Year after year, they��ve become nicer and more expensive, really setting them apart from all other bracelets.

Some of the modern Main Event bracelets have been estimated to be worth hundreds of thousands based on the value of the materials and the design.

These WSOP bracelets contain gold and precious stones, making them fairly expensive pieces of jewelry. But we��ll get back to that in a minute.

Can You Buy A WSOP Bracelet �C And For How Much?

When it comes to sports memorabilia, the value of an item often doesn��t have much to do with its physical value.

Usually, it comes down to what someone is willing to pay for it, and over the years, there have been several examples of WSOP bracelets being bought and sold online.

In 2019, a WSOP bracelet won in a $2,500 Limit Omaha event was put up for an auction on eBay. It reached the final price of $50,000, which was quite a hefty sum for an ��ordinary�� bracelet.

Perhaps the most famous case of a WSOP bracelet being put up for sale happened in 2013.

In that year, the 2006 Main Event bracelet popped up on an auction site. It was the largest Main Event in history that was won by Jamie Gold, who banked $12 million for his efforts.

The bracelet was eventually sold for more than $65,000, but later on, Gold went on record to say he had nothing to do with the auction, and it was out of his hands. He said that if it were up to him, he’d never give up on it.

Another fairly notorious WSOP bracelet auction happened in 2010, when Peter Eastgate, another Main Event winner, put up his bracelet for sale.

Unlike Gold, Eastgate was happy to sell his bracelet, with all proceeds going to charity. It went for $147,500 and the money went to UNICEF.

But, not all bracelets sold on eBay reached five-figure amounts. For example, TJ Cloutier sold his 2005 Hold��em bracelet for a mere $2,500.

All in all, WSOP bracelets pop up on eBay and other sales sites from time to time.

How much you��ll have to pay for one will depend on how much interest there is. You can probably get your hands on a ��regular�� bracelet for a few thousand dollars.

It��s also worth noting that the number of bracelet-awarding events has been growing every year, so there are more and more bracelets floating out there.

In 2020, the World Series of Poker took place entirely online, making bracelets even more accessible.

This is to say that we could see an increased number of WSOP bracelets sold online in the years to come.

With more of them being available, average prices might drop down as well, so don��t be surprised if you see one of them with a starting price of just a few hundred.

If you take a look at discussions on Reddit, you’ll see there’s a lot of debate surrounding their worth, which shows that it’s hard to pin a value on a bracelet.

Who Makes WSOP Bracelets?

If you check out a WSOP bracelet, especially the ones awarded for Main Events and other major tournaments such as Players Championship or Big One for One Drop, you��ll notice that they��re fine-crafted pieces of jewelry.

There��s quite a bit of work that goes into making them.

So, who actually makes these WSOP bracelets?

Over the years, the World Series of Poker has worked with several companies, each of them putting their own touch into crafting the finest and most-coveted poker jewelry to attract players from all over the world.

In recent years, the WSOP has been working with a company called Jostens to design and create bracelets for the tournaments.

They were the ones behind the 2019 Main Event bracelet, which was very special, as this was the year the Series was celebrating its 50^th anniversary.

This particular bracelet was made out of 10K gold and contained 2,252 gemstones �C 77 rubies and 2,175 diamonds.

This brought its total weight to 40 carats of gems, making it one of the most precious trophies you can find.

This beautiful piece of jewelry, alongside the $10 million first prize, went to Hossein Ensan.

In general, WSOP bracelets are crafted by companies experienced in making high-value jewelry and sports trophies, like Jostens.

It’s not just about the value of the materials used but also about making these bracelets look unique and exquisite.

Future Of WSOP Bracelets

For over 45 years, the World Series of Poker has awarded bracelets to the tournament winners. By this point, bracelets have become synonymous with the WSOP.

It would be very strange if the organizers decided out of the blue to change this tradition and start awarding cups or different trophies.

So, for the foreseeable future, there is no reason to think WSOP bracelets are going anywhere.

That being said, there has been some debate about the overall value and prestige that come attached to these trinkets.

With the number of WSOP events constantly increasing and the addition of online tournaments, claiming a World Series bracelet no longer represents the challenge it once did.

Year after year, there are more and more bracelets awarded, which has led some professional players to question the WSOP and their intentions.

The main objection is that having so many bracelet-awarding events hurts the value of a bracelet.

If they��re so easy to come by and you can get one by playing from home in a tournament with the buy-in of just a couple of hundred dollars, it��ll start to lose its appeal and prestige.

There is definitely some weight to this argument, but there��s also the other side of the coin.

With WSOP bracelets no longer being so ��exclusive�� it could serve as an inspiration for more players to get involved and jump into the action.

What Are WSOP Rings?

Pretty much everyone who��s been following poker knows about WSOP bracelets. These are covered quite heavily by the poker media every year, and every bracelet winner gets at least one article written about them.

But, you may have also heard about WSOP rings, and this could be a bit confusing.

If there are already bracelets, what are rings for? Do bracelet winners also get rings, or how does this work?

The WSOP rings are actually awarded to winners of an entirely different competition, known as the WSOP Circuit, or WSOPC.

These are tournaments with smaller buy-ins that take place all over the United States, Europe, and other parts of the world.

Although the competition is organized by the same company, WSOP rings and WSOP bracelets don��t have much in common.

These are trophies awarded for completely different tournaments.

The WSOP Circuit isn��t nearly as prestigious as the World Series of Poker, but winning a ring or two is still quite an accomplishment.

In fact, the competition in WSOPC tournaments is often much harsher than what you��ll encounter at the actual World Series, as these events attract many serious players who play poker for a living.

 No Real Price Tag

This article pretty much covers everything you need to know about WSOP bracelets.

These coveted pieces of poker jewelry certainly have quite a bit of history behind them and are something that many poker players and fans are interested in.

It’s hard to say how much a WSOP bracelet is actually worth, as numerous aspects come into it.

At the end of the day, a WSOP bracelet will always have a different value for different people beyond its actual market value.

For some, it’s a valuable piece of memory and proof of their poker abilities.

For others, it’s just a piece of metal with no sentimental value to it �C and that��s just how it is.

Lead image: Hayley Hochstetler via Twitter/WSOP

Almost limitless potential to make money coupled with the free lifestyle has been one of the main reasons behind this phenomenon.

However, while there are dozens of thousands of people playing poker for a living today, it��s quite clear that a select few have been a lot more successful than others.

Players who manage to turn the game into a profitable endeavor spend a lot of time learning the ropes.

Most go through many ups and downs before finally finding their comfort zone, but some seem to skip this whole process almost entirely and go from learning the rules straight to winning.

This naturally brings up the question of why.

What is it that makes these players master the game with such ease? Are they somehow naturally predisposed to excel in poker?

Is the game somehow a part of their being, and, more importantly, is poker in your DNA?

What Makes Someone Good At Poker?

If you��re a poker fan of any kind, you must have pondered at least once or twice what it would be like to play the game professionally. Even for the calmest and most rooted of spirits, the idea has some appeal to it.

But, there is always the big question that comes from these thoughts. Do I have what it takes?

1. A Mathematically-Inclined Brain

First and foremost, poker is a game of numbers.

You��ll hear many different opinions on the topic, but the bottom line is that if you don’t understand the math behind the game, you won’t do well in the long run.

Have you always had a knack for numbers, graphs, and percentages? If yes, there is a good chance you could do well in poker.

Many of the players who you see on TV and who built their bankrolls from scratch enjoy numbers more than most people can fathom.

It��s one thing to understand how percentages work. Reveling in them is a different matter entirely.

If you��ve read the last few paragraphs shaking your head, don��t worry: Not all is lost. Being crazy about numbers can be a great asset for a poker player, but it��s not essential.

That said, if you hate math and don’t want to be anywhere near it, poker probably isn��t in your DNA.

One of the things that makes poker a game of skill and strategy is its mathematical aspect. Without it, it would just be another game with cards in which the luckiest person wins.

2. Good Instincts You Can Trust

Another personality trait that could indicate poker might be in your DNA is good instincts.

Now, all of us have instincts, but not everyone is as confident about them.

If you��re someone who has very good instincts and intuition, you probably know it by this point in life. You��ll have been in situations where you relied upon them, and they helped you out of some difficult spots.

At the poker table, good instincts can be truly invaluable.

As much as the game is about odds and stats, you rarely have the full scope of information to work with. A part of it is guesswork.

Of course, math wizards rely on complex GTO calculations to figure it out, but good instincts can also be very helpful.

So, if you’re good at “reading” people, i.e., figuring out when someone isn’t honest with you, you��ll find that this skill will be of great use, especially in live games, where people often can’t hide their emotions or do a very poor job of it.

3. Risk Tolerance

At the end of the day, poker has a gambling element to it in the short run.

Even the best poker players have often been in the position where they came close to busting their entire bankroll (or actually did), either due to really bad luck, poor bankroll management, or, usually, a combination of both.

But when you listen to them talk about it, you can almost hear the excitement in their voice. You don��t get the feeling they��re talking about something unpleasant.

This is because people who have poker in their DNA have a much higher tolerance for risk and don��t see this aspect of the game as tragic.

If you��re truly naturally predisposed for the game, you��re going to enjoy every aspect of it in some way �C even the not-so-pleasant parts.

You��ve probably heard poker players refer to themselves as ��degens” (abbreviation of degenerate gambler, meaning always broke because of gambling).

Now, you might think, in what world can this word have any positive connotation?

The answer is �C in the poker world.

You don��t want to be a ��degen” or reckless, but, at the same time, you kind of do.

Playing poker isn’t just about making money. It’s about having fun and experiencing everything it has to offer. The good, the bad, and all that comes in between.

You might be reading this and thinking �C that��s not right, there are so many great players who don��t behave like that.

You��re absolutely right!

This isn��t a mandatory personality trait to excel at the game. There are many great players who observe it purely as a business and have had consistent results for decades.

These players have usually built their bankrolls over long periods of time, and they’re very unlikely to go bust. Their calm, calculated, and systematic approach to the game has served them well over the years.

Those who made their seven-figure bankrolls in a matter of months are also much likelier to take big risks in the future and bust. Just think about someone like “Isildur1.”

He could go through seven figures in a matter of hours without blinking.

And when he��d bust, he��d go back to grinding lower stakes and rebuilding his roll, just to do it all over again.

This isn��t what you��d call ��normal�� behavior, but up until recently, poker hasn��t been considered a normal profession, either.

4. Not Caring Too Much About What People Think Of You

Given the fact that poker is still not that widely accepted, to fall in love with the game, you probably have to think outside of the box.

In a society established this way, how do you come up with the idea of playing cards and shuffling chips for a living?

What happened to good, old-fashioned hard work and ambition?

What most people outside of the poker world don��t understand is that playing poker seriously is hard work. It��s not just about learning to play well.

It��s hard to put your best effort every time you sit down at the table and to repeat it session after session.

It seems easy to someone looking from the outside, but it��s anything but easy, even if poker is in your DNA.

Considering all these things, you have to be the kind of person who feels comfortable stepping outside traditional social boundaries.

Unless you��re very fortunate, your loved ones will be at least mildly shocked by the idea you find poker a viable career choice.

It takes a special kind of a person to resist all the negativity and stand their ground.

But, if poker is something you truly love and enjoy and if you feel naturally good at it, it won��t matter as much.

It��s weird, really, but it��s one of those things you��ll probably know after playing in your first cash game or a tournament.

Even with very limited knowledge about exact strategies, the game will just make sense to you.

You will feel like you belong at a poker table despite being surrounded by players much more experienced than you having a feeding frenzy on your stack.

You��ll know that there is a way to get better and return the favor, and you��ll be eager to learn about the game.

If you find poker boring or not too exciting, you might still become a very good player, but you��ll never enjoy it as much as someone who cherishes every moment of it in some way, including mandatory bad beats and coolers.

Hard Work vs Natural Talent – What Matters Most?

I’ve said repeatedly throughout this article that you don’t have to be naturally talented at poker to succeed in the game.

Like with most things in life, a natural inclination is a good starting advantage, but it doesn��t guarantee you anything.

Having poker in your DNA alone won��t make you one of the top players, especially in this day and age.

In fact, it can even be a bad thing sometimes.

Naturally talented players often experience a degree of success at the start of their careers. Combined with some good runs, their talent is enough to make them winners at lower stakes, where the competition isn’t as fierce.

As they move up the stakes, though, they come across much tougher opponents, and find that talent alone is no longer enough.

It��s at this junction where poker players are made or broken.

Players who realize that they need to put their talent to good use and apply themselves to studying the game to keep growing will thrive and go on to achieve success more often than not.

Those aren��t prepared to put the hours in will either abandon the game or become the ��reg fish�� type that games are formed around.

Hard work beats talent 99 percent of the time in the long run, and we all know that poker is all about the long run.

So, Do You Have Poker In Your DNA?

The fact that you��re reading this article suggests that you have some degree of love for the game.

Otherwise, I don��t see how you��d stumble upon it, let alone get all the way down to these final passages.

If you��ve recognized yourself in some of the points I��ve made here, the odds are that you have at least a bit of poker in your soul.

Whether it��s just traces or a serious part of your entire genome can��t be determined without further testing.

On a more serious note, you shouldn’t focus too much on this idea.

You don’t have to be a genius to be a great poker player. If you enjoy the game and don’t mind learning about it, you’re already halfway there.

The biggest pitfall you can fall into is thinking you��re too good and too talented to take advice from anyone.

If you aren��t beating the games consistently, it doesn��t matter if you have poker in your DNA or not. It��s a clear sign you need to improve �C and you won��t achieve that without putting in serious work.

Take every opportunity you can to study and get better, and it won��t be long before you��re watching all of the ��talented�� kids in the rearview mirror as you move up the stakes!